- Manuals
- Brands
- Mitsubishi
- Hardware
- GOT1000
- User's Manual
Mitsubishi GOT1000 GT16 Hardware User's Manual PDF


Summary of Content for Mitsubishi GOT1000 GT16 Hardware User's Manual PDF
GT16 User's Manual (Hardware)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Always read these precautions before using this equipment.)
Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly. The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product. In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as "WARNING" and "CAUTION".
Note that the caution level may lead to a serious accident according to the circumstances. Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety.
Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.
[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS] WARNING
Some failures of the GOT, communication unit or cable may keep the outputs on or off. Some failures of a touch panel may cause malfunction of the input objects such as a touch switch. An external monitoring circuit should be provided to check for output signals which may lead to a serious accident. Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.
If a communication fault (including cable disconnection) occurs during monitoring on the GOT, communication between the GOT and PLC CPU is suspended and the GOT becomes inoperative. For bus connection: The CPU becomes faulty and the GOT becomes inoperative. For other than bus connection: The GOT becomes inoperative. A system where the GOT is used should be configured to perform any significant operation to the system by using the switches of a device other than the GOT on the assumption that a GOT communication fault will occur. Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.
Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident. An independent and redundant hardware or mechanical interlock is required to configure the device that displays and outputs serious warning. Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction.
WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.
CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage.
A - 1
[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS] WARNING
Incorrect operation of the touch switch(s) may lead to a serious accident if the GOT backlight is gone out. When the GOT backlight goes out, although the POWER LED blinks (green/orange) and the display section dims, the input of the touch switch(s) remains active. This may confuse an operator in thinking that the GOT is in "screensaver" mode, who then tries to release the GOT from this mode by touching the display section, which may cause a touch switch to operate. Note that the following occurs on the GOT when the backlight goes out. GT1655-V: The POWER LED blinks (green/orange) and the monitor screen appears blank. Models other than GT1655-V: The POWER LED blinks (green/orange) and the monitor screen
appears dimmed. The display section of the GT16 is an analog-resistive type touch panel. If you touch the display section simultaneously in 2 points or more, the switch that is located around the center of the touched point, if any, may operate. Do not touch the display section in 2 points or more simultaneously. Doing so may cause an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction.
When programs or parameters of the controller (such as a PLC) that is monitored by the GOT are changed, be sure to reset the GOT, or turn on the unit again after shutting off the power as soon as possible. Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.
To maintain the security (confidentiality, integrity, and availability) of the GOT and the system against unauthorized access, DoS*1 attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks from unreliable networks and devices via network, take appropriate measures such as firewalls, virtual private networks (VPNs), and antivirus solutions. Mitsubishi Electric shall have no responsibility or liability for any problems involving GOT trouble and system trouble by unauthorized access, DoS attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks. *1 DoS: A denial-of-service (DoS) attack disrupts services by overloading systems or exploiting vulnerabilities, resulting in a denial-of-service (DoS) state.
CAUTION Do not bundle the control and communication cables with main-circuit, power or other wiring. Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm (3.94in.) apart.Not doing so noise can cause a malfunction.
Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver. Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section.
When the GOT is connected to the Ethernet network, the available IP address is restricted according to the system configuration. When multiple GOTs are connected to the Ethernet network:
Do not set the IP address (192.168.0.18) for the GOTs and the controllers in the network. When a single GOT is connected to the Ethernet network:
Do not set the IP address (192.168.0.18) for the controllers except the GOT in the network. Doing so can cause the IP address duplication. The duplication can negatively affect the communication of the device with the IP address (192.168.0.18). The operation at the IP address duplication depends on the devices and the system.
A - 2
[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]
[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION Turn on the controllers and the network devices to be ready for communication before they communicate with the GOT. Failure to do so can cause a communication error on the GOT.
WARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the GOT main unit to/from the panel. Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.
Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the communication unit, printer unit or option function board onto/from the GOT. Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.
When installing the option function board, wear an earth band etc. to avoid the static electricity. Not doing so can cause a unit corruption.
CAUTION Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in this manual. Not doing so can cause an electric shock, fire, malfunction or product damage or deterioration.
When mounting the GOT to the control panel, tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range (0.36 to 0.48 Nm) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2. Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a drop, short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT.
When loading the communication unit to the GOT, fit it to the connection interface of the GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range (0.36 to 0.48 Nm) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2. Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a drop, failure or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.
When mounting the option function board onto the GOT, connect it to the corresponding connector securely and tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range (0.25 to 0.35 Nm) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No.1. Undertightening can cause malfunction due to poor contact. Overtightening can cause malfunction due to screw or unit damage.
When inserting a CF card into the GOT, push it into the CF card interface of GOT until the CF card eject button will pop out. If not properly inserted, a bad connection may cause a malfunction.
A - 3
[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]
[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION When inserting/removing a CF card into/from the GOT, turn the CF card access switch off in advance. Failure to do so may corrupt data within the CF card.
When removing a CF card from the GOT, make sure to support the CF card by hand, as it may pop out. Failure to do so may cause the CF card to drop from the GOT and break.
When installing a USB memory to the GOT, make sure to install the USB memory to the USB interface firmly. Failure to do so may cause a malfunction due to poor contact.
Before removing the USB memory from the GOT, operate the utility screen for removal. After the successful completion dialog box is displayed, remove the memory by hand carefully. Failure to do so may cause the USB memory to drop, resulting in a damage or failure of the memory.
For closing the USB environmental protection cover, fix the cover by pushing the mark on the latch firmly to comply with the protective structure.
Remove the protective film of the GOT. When the user continues using the GOT with the protective film, the film may not be removed.
Operate and store the GOT in environments without direct sunlight, high temperature, dust, humidity, and vibrations.
When using the GOT in the environment of oil or chemicals, use the protective cover for oil. Failure to do so may cause failure or malfunction due to the oil or chemical entering into the GOT.
WARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring. Failure to do so may result in an electric shock, product damage or malfunctions.
CAUTION Make sure to ground the FG terminal, LG terminal, and functional ground terminal of the GOT power supply section with a ground resistance of 100 or less solely for the GOT. Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction.
When tightening the terminal screws, use a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2.
Terminal screws which are not to be used must be tightened always at torque 0.5 to 0.8 Nm. Otherwise there will be a danger of short circuit against the solderless terminals.
Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them with the specified torque. If any solderless spade terminal is used, it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose, resulting in failure.
A - 4
[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]
[TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS]
[STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrangement of the product. Not doing so can cause a fire or failure.
Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range (0.5 to 0.8 N.m). Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT.
Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT. Not doing so can cause a fire, failure or malfunction.
The module has an ingress prevention label on its top to prevent foreign matter, such as wire offcuts, from entering the module during wiring. Do not peel this label during wiring. Before starting system operation, be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation.
Plug the communication cable into the GOT interface or the connector of the connected unit, and tighten the mounting screws and the terminal screws in the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.
Plug the QnA/ACPU/Motion controller(A series) bus connection cable by inserting it into the connector of the connected unit until it "clicks". After plugging, check that it has been inserted snugly. Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault.
WARNING Before performing the test operations of the user creation monitor screen (such as turning ON or OFF bit device, changing the word device current value, changing the settings or current values of the timer or counter, and changing the buffer memory current value), read through the manual carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation method. During test operation, never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant operation for the system. False output or malfunction can cause an accident.
WARNING When power is on, do not touch the terminals. Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction.
A - 5
[STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS] WARNING
Correctly connect the battery connector. Do not perform the following actions to the battery. Charging, disassembling, heating, short-circuiting, or soldering the battery, or throwing it into the
fire Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat, explode, or ignite, resulting in injuly and fire.
Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening, always switch off the power externally in all phases. Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction. Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.
CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify this unit. Doing so can cause a failure, malfunction, injury, or fire.
Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly. Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure.
The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped. Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling, motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.
When unplugging the cable connected to the unit, do not hold and pull the cable portion. Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.
Do not drop the module or subject it to strong shock. A module damage may result.
Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the unit. Doing so may damage the battery, causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery. If the battery is dropped or given an impact, dispose of it without using.
Before touching the unit, always touch grounded metal, etc. to discharge static electricity from human body, etc. Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.
Replace battery with GT15-BAT or GT11-50BAT by Mitsubishi electric Co. only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion.
Dispose of used battery promptly. Keep away from children. Do not disassemble and do not dispose of in fire.
A - 6
[TOUCH PANEL PRECAUTIONS]
[COLD CATHODE TUBE BACKLIGHT REPLACEMENT PRECAUTIONS]
[DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION For the analog-resistive film type touch panels, normally the adjustment is not required. However, the difference between a touched position and the object position may occur as the period of use elapses. When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, execute the touch panel calibration.
When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, other objects may be activated. This may cause an unexpected operation due to incorrect output or malfunction.
WARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply of the GOT (and the PLC CPU in the case of a bus topology) and remove the GOT from the control panel before replacing the backlight (when using the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the user). Not doing so can cause an electric shock. Replacing a backlight without removing the GOT from the control panel can cause the backlight to drop, resulting in an injury.
CAUTION Wear gloves for the backlight replacement when using the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the user. Not doing so can cause an injury.
Before replacing a backlight, allow 5 minutes or more after turning off the GOT when using the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the user. Not doing so can cause a burn from heat of the backlight.
CAUTION When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste.
When disposing of batteries, separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations. (For details of the battery directive in EU member states, refer to Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built-in Batteries in EU Member States.)
A - 7
[TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS] CAUTION
When transporting lithium batteries, make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations. (Refer to Appendix 3 for details of the regurated models.)
Make sure to transport the GOT main unit and/or relevant unit(s) in the manner they will not be exposed to the impact exceeding the impact resistance described in the general specifications of this manual, as they are precision devices. Failure to do so may cause the unit to fail. Check if the unit operates correctly after transportation.
When fumigants that contain halogen materials such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine are used for disinfecting and protecting wooden packaging from insects, they cause malfunction when entering our products. Please take necessary precautions to ensure that remaining materials from fumigant do not enter our products, or treat packaging with methods other than fumigation (heat method). Additionally, disinfect and protect wood from insects before packing products.
A - 8
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................................A - 1
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................A - 9
CONTENTS ..............................................................................................................................................A - 9
ABOUT MANUALS .................................................................................................................................A - 13
QUICK REFERENCE .............................................................................................................................A - 16
ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS ...........................................................................................A - 18
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL................................................................................................................A - 23
PACKING LIST .......................................................................................................................................A - 24
1. OVERVIEW 1.1 Features........................................................................................................................................... 1 - 2
1.2 Rough Pre-operation Procedure...................................................................................................... 1 - 3
2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2.1 Overall Configuration ....................................................................................................................... 2 - 1
2.2 Component List................................................................................................................................ 2 - 2 2.2.1 GOT...................................................................................................................................... 2 - 4 2.2.2 Option ................................................................................................................................... 2 - 5
3. SPECIFICATIONS 3.1 General Specifications..................................................................................................................... 3 - 1
3.2 Performance Specifications ............................................................................................................. 3 - 2 3.2.1 GT1695M-X .......................................................................................................................... 3 - 2 3.2.2 GT1685M-S .......................................................................................................................... 3 - 5 3.2.3 GT1675M-S, GT1675M-V, GT1675-VN, GT1672-VN .......................................................... 3 - 8 3.2.4 GT1665M-S, GT1665M-V, GT1662-VN ............................................................................. 3 - 11 3.2.5 GT1655-V ........................................................................................................................... 3 - 14
3.3 Power Supply Specifications ......................................................................................................... 3 - 17 3.3.1 For GOTs powered from the 100 to 240VAC power supply ............................................... 3 - 17 3.3.2 For GOTs powered from the 24VDC power supply ............................................................ 3 - 18
3.4 Battery Specifications .................................................................................................................... 3 - 19
4. PART NAME AND SETTINGS 4.1 Part Names and Settings of the GT1695......................................................................................... 4 - 1
4.2 Part Names and Settings of the GT1685......................................................................................... 4 - 3
4.3 Part Names and Settings of the GT1675, GT1672.......................................................................... 4 - 5
4.4 Part Names and Settings of the GT1665, GT1662.......................................................................... 4 - 7
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for choosing the Mitsubishi Electric Graphic Operation Terminal. Before using the equipment, please read this manual carefully to use the equipment to its optimum.
CONTENTS
A - 9
4.5 Part Names and Settings of the GT1655......................................................................................... 4 - 9
5. EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 5.1 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive ............................................................................................. 5 - 1
5.1.1 EMC directive ....................................................................................................................... 5 - 2 5.1.2 Control panel ........................................................................................................................ 5 - 3 5.1.3 Noise filter (power supply line filter)...................................................................................... 5 - 4
5.2 Requirements for Conpliance with the Low Voltage Directive ......................................................... 5 - 5 5.2.1 Standard subject to GOT...................................................................................................... 5 - 5 5.2.2 Power supply ........................................................................................................................ 5 - 5 5.2.3 Control panel ........................................................................................................................ 5 - 6 5.2.4 Grounding ............................................................................................................................. 5 - 6 5.2.5 External wiring ...................................................................................................................... 5 - 6
5.3 EMC Directive-Compliant System Configuration ............................................................................. 5 - 7 5.3.1 GOT...................................................................................................................................... 5 - 7 5.3.2 Connection method............................................................................................................... 5 - 8 5.3.3 When the communication unit is used .................................................................................. 5 - 9 5.3.4 When the option unit is used .............................................................................................. 5 - 11 5.3.5 When the option is used ..................................................................................................... 5 - 11 5.3.6 Cables................................................................................................................................. 5 - 12
5.4 Precautions for Wiring/Connecting the EMC Directive-Compliant Product.................................... 5 - 13 5.4.1 Power and ground wires wiring method.............................................................................. 5 - 13 5.4.2 Processing connection cables ............................................................................................ 5 - 15 5.4.3 Grounding the cable ........................................................................................................... 5 - 21
6. INSTALLATION 6.1 Control Panel Inside Dimensions for Mounting GOT....................................................................... 6 - 1
6.2 Panel Cutting Dimensions ............................................................................................................... 6 - 2
6.3 Mounting Position ............................................................................................................................ 6 - 3
6.4 Control Panel Inside Temperature and Mounting Angle................................................................ 6 - 10
6.5 Installation Procedure .................................................................................................................... 6 - 10
7. WIRING 7.1 Power Supply Wiring ....................................................................................................................... 7 - 2
7.2 Wiring to GOT Power Section.......................................................................................................... 7 - 3
7.3 Grounding ........................................................................................................................................ 7 - 4 7.3.1 Grounding the GOT .............................................................................................................. 7 - 4 7.3.2 Wiring-related malfunction causes and the measures examples ......................................... 7 - 6
7.4 Panel Inside Wiring, Panel Outside Wiring ...................................................................................... 7 - 8 7.4.1 Panel inside wiring................................................................................................................ 7 - 8 7.4.2 Panel outside wiring.............................................................................................................. 7 - 8
7.5 Attaching Surge Suppressor for Control Equipment ........................................................................ 7 - 9
7.6 Grounding Extension Units ............................................................................................................ 7 - 10 7.6.1 Wiring FG cable of bus connection cable ........................................................................... 7 - 10 7.6.2 Wiring FG cable of CF card extension unit connection cable ............................................. 7 - 11
A - 10
8. OPTION 8.1 Communication Unit ........................................................................................................................ 8 - 1
8.1.1 Applicable communication unit ............................................................................................. 8 - 1 8.1.2 Installing multiple extension units in layers........................................................................... 8 - 2
8.2 Option Unit....................................................................................................................................... 8 - 4 8.2.1 Applicable option unit ........................................................................................................... 8 - 4
8.3 Option .............................................................................................................................................. 8 - 5 8.3.1 Applicable option .................................................................................................................. 8 - 5 8.3.2 Installation procedure ........................................................................................................... 8 - 7
8.4 Cable ............................................................................................................................................. 8 - 22 8.4.1 Applicable cable ................................................................................................................. 8 - 22 8.4.2 Installing procedure ............................................................................................................ 8 - 22
8.5 Other Equipments Connected to the Main Unit ............................................................................. 8 - 23 8.5.1 Applicable other equipments connected to the main unit ................................................... 8 - 23 8.5.2 Installation procedure ......................................................................................................... 8 - 23
9. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 9.1 Daily Inspection ............................................................................................................................... 9 - 2
9.2 Periodic Inspection .......................................................................................................................... 9 - 2
9.3 Cleaning Method.............................................................................................................................. 9 - 3
9.4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement............................................................... 9 - 4
9.5 Backlight Shutoff Detection and Replacement ................................................................................ 9 - 6
9.6 Backlight Replacement .................................................................................................................... 9 - 7 9.6.1 Applicable backlight .............................................................................................................. 9 - 7 9.6.2 Replacement procedure of backlight .................................................................................... 9 - 7
10. TROUBLESHOOTING 10.1 GOT Restoration Sheet ................................................................................................................. 10 - 1
10.2 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection............................................................................................. 10 - 12 10.2.1 Locating error positions .................................................................................................... 10 - 12 10.2.2 Further locating error positions......................................................................................... 10 - 13 10.2.3 Specific example of troubleshooting................................................................................. 10 - 14
10.3 Error Message and System Alarm............................................................................................... 10 - 15 10.3.1 Error contents display....................................................................................................... 10 - 15 10.3.2 List of error message/system alarm ................................................................................. 10 - 18
APPENDICES Appendix1 External Dimensions............................................................................................................App - 1
Appendix2 Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards ...........................................................App - 14
Appendix3 Transportation Precautions ...............................................................................................App - 15 Appendix.3.1 Relevant models........................................................................................................App - 15 Appendix.3.2 Transportation guidelines ..........................................................................................App - 15
Appendix4 How to Choose Drive.........................................................................................................App - 16
A - 11
INDEX
REVISIONS
WARRANTY
A - 12
ABOUT MANUALS
The following table lists the manual relevant to GT Designer2 product. Refer to each manual for any purpose.
Manual Name Packing Manual Number
(Model code)
GT SoftGOT1000 Version2 Operating Manual Stored in CD-ROM SH-080602ENG
(1D7M48)
GT Designer2 Version2 Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (For GOT1000 Series) Stored in CD-ROM SH-080529ENG
(1D7M24)
GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) 1/3 GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) 2/3 GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) 3/3
Stored in CD-ROM SH-080530ENG
(1D7M25)
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (1/3) GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (2/3) GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (3/3)
Stored in CD-ROM SH-080532ENG
(1D7M26)
GOT1000 Series Extended/Option Functions Manual Stored in CD-ROM SH-080544ENG
(1D7M32)
GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual Stored in CD-ROM SH-080545ENG
(1D7M33)
GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual Stored in CD-ROM SH-080654ENG
(1D7M63)
A - 13
The following table lists the manual relevant to GT Works3 product. Refer to each manual for any purpose.
Screen creation software manuals
Connection manuals
Extended and option function manuals
GT SoftGOT1000 manuals
Manual Name Packaging Manual Number
(Model code)
GT Works3 Version1 Installation Procedure Manual Enclosed in product -
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2 Stored in CD-ROM SH-080866ENG
(1D7MB9)
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) 1/2, 2/2 Stored in CD-ROM SH-080867ENG
(1D7MC1)
GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM SH-080861ENG
(1D7MB1)
GT Converter2 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM SH-080862ENG
(1D7MB2)
Manual Name Packaging Manual Number
(Model code)
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM SH-080868ENG
(1D7MC2)
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1) for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM SH-080869ENG
(1D7MC3)
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2) for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM SH-080870ENG
(1D7MC4)
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT Works3
Stored in CD-ROM SH-080871ENG
(1D7MC5)
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (2 Connection) for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM JY997D39201
Manual Name Packaging Manual Number
(Model code)
GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM SH-080858ENG
(1D7MA7)
GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM SH-080859ENG
(1D7MA8)
GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option Functions) for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM SH-080863ENG
(1D7MB3)
Manual Name Packaging Manual Number
(Model code)
GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM SH-080860ENG
(1D7MA9)
A - 14
GT16 manuals
GT15 manuals
GT14 manuals
GT12 manuals
GT11 manuals
GT10 manuals
Manual Name Packaging Manual Number
(Model code)
GT16 User's Manual (Hardware) Stored in CD-ROM SH-080928ENG
(1D7MD3)
GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility) Stored in CD-ROM SH-080929ENG
(1D7MD4)
GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM JY997D41201 JY997D41202
(09R821)
Manual Name Packaging Manual Number
(Model code)
GT15 User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM SH-080528ENG
(1D7M23)
Manual Name Packaging Manual Number
(Model code)
GT14 User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM JY997D44801
(09R823)
Manual Name Packaging Manual Number
(Model code)
GT12 User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM SH-080977ENG
(1D7ME1)
Manual Name Packaging Manual Number
(Model code)
GT11 User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM JY997D17501
(09R815)
GT11 Handy GOT User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM JY997D20101 JY997D20102
(09R817)
Manual Name Packaging Manual Number
(Model code)
GT10 User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM JY997D24701
(09R819)
A - 15
QUICK REFERENCE
Creating a project
Connecting a controller to the GOT
Transferring data to the GOT
Obtaining the specifications and operation methods of GT Designer3
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2
Setting available functions on GT Designer3
Creating a screen displayed on the GOT
Obtaining useful functions to increase efficiency of drawing
Setting details for figures and objects
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) 1/2, 2/2
Setting functions for the data collection or trigger action
Setting functions to use peripheral devices
Simulating a created project on a personal computer GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3
Obtaining information of Mitsubishi Electric products applicable to the GOT
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3
Connecting Mitsubishi Electric products to the GOT
Connecting multiple controllersto one GOT (Multi-channel function)
Establishing communication between a personal computer and a controller via the GOT (FA transparent function)
Obtaining information of Non-Mitsubishi Electric products applicable to the GOT
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1) for GT Works3
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2) for GT Works3Connecting Non-Mitsubishi Electric products to the GOT
Obtaining information of peripheral devices applicable to the GOT GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT Works3
Connecting peripheral devices including a barcode reader to the GOT
Connecting 2 with GOT GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (2 Connection) for GT Works3
Writing data to the GOT
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2
Reading data from the GOT
Verifying a editing project to a GOT project
A - 16
Others Obtaining specifications (including part names, external dimensions, and options) of each GOT
GT16 User's Manual (Hardware) GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual GT15 User's Manual GT14 User's Manual GT12 User's Manual GT11 User's Manual GT11 Handy GOT User's Manual GT10 User's Manual
Installing the GOT
Operating the utility
GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility) GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual GT15 User's Manual GT14 User's Manual GT12 User's Manual GT11 User's Manual GT11 Handy GOT User's Manual GT10 User's Manual
Configuring the gateway function GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3
Configuring the MES interface function GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT Works3
Configuring the extended function and option function GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option Functions) for GT Works3
Using a personal computer as the GOT GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3
A - 17
ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS
Abbreviations and generic terms used in this manual are as follows:
GOT Abbreviations and generic terms Description
GOT1000 Series
GT1695 GT1695M-X Abbreviation of GT1695M-XTBA, GT1695M-XTBD
GT1685 GT1685M-S Abbreviation of GT1685M-STBA, GT1685M-STBD
GT1675 GT1675M-S Abbreviation of GT1675M-STBA, GT1675M-STBD
GT1675M-V Abbreviation of GT1675M-VTBA, GT1675M-VTBD
GT1675-VN Abbreviation of GT1675-VNBA, GT1675-VNBD
GT1672 GT1672-VN Abbreviation of GT1672-VNBA, GT1672-VNBD
GT1665 GT1665M-S Abbreviation of GT1665M-STBA, GT1665M-STBD
GT1665M-V Abbreviation of GT1665M-VTBA, GT1665M-VTBD
GT1662 GT1662-VN Abbreviation of GT1662-VNBA, GT1662-VNBD
GT1655 GT1655-V Abbreviation of GT1655-VTBD
GT16 Abbreviation of GT1695, GT1685, GT1675, GT1672, GT1665, GT1662, GT1655, GT16 Handy GOT
GT1595 GT1595-X Abbreviation of GT1595-XTBA, GT1595-XTBD
GT1585 GT1585V-S Abbreviation of GT1585V-STBA, GT1585V-STBD
GT1585-S Abbreviation of GT1585-STBA, GT1585-STBD
GT157
GT1575V-S Abbreviation of GT1575V-STBA, GT1575V-STBD
GT1575-S Abbreviation of GT1575-STBA, GT1575-STBD
GT1575-V Abbreviation of GT1575-VTBA, GT1575-VTBD
GT1575-VN Abbreviation of GT1575-VNBA, GT1575-VNBD
GT1572-VN Abbreviation of GT1572-VNBA, GT1572-VNBD
GT156 GT1565-V Abbreviation of GT1565-VTBA, GT1565-VTBD
GT1562-VN Abbreviation of GT1562-VNBA, GT1562-VNBD
GT155 GT1555-V Abbreviation of GT1555-VTBD
GT1555-Q Abbreviation of GT1555-QTBD, GT1555-QSBD
GT1550-Q Abbreviation of GT1550-QLBD
GT15 Abbreviation of GT1595, GT1585, GT157 , GT156 , GT155
GT145 GT1455-Q Abbreviation of GT1455-QTBDE, GT1455-QTBD
GT1450-Q Abbreviation of GT1450-QLBDE, GT1450-QLBD
GT14 Abbreviation of GT1455-Q, GT1450-Q
GT1275 GT1275-V Abbreviation of GT1275-VNBA, GT1275-VNBD
GT1265 GT1265-V Abbreviation of GT1265-VNBA, GT1265-VNBD
GT12 Abbreviation of GT1275, GT1265
GT115 GT1155-Q
Abbreviation of GT1155-QTBDQ, GT1155-QSBDQ, GT1155-QTBDA, GT1155-QSBDA, GT1155-QTBD, GT1155-QSBD
GT1150-Q Abbreviation of GT1150-QLBDQ, GT1150-QLBDA, GT1150-QLBD
GT11 Abbreviation of GT1155-Q, GT1150-Q, GT11 Handy GOT
GT105 GT1055-Q Abbreviation of GT1055-QSBD
GT1050-Q Abbreviation of GT1050-QBBD
GT104 GT1045-Q Abbreviation of GT1045-QSBD
GT1040-Q Abbreviation of GT1040-QBBD
GT1030
Abbreviation of GT1030-LBD, GT1030-LBD2, GT1030-LBL, GT1030-LBDW, GT1030-LBDW2, GT1030-LBLW, GT1030-LWD, GT1030-LWD2, GT1030-LWL, GT1030-LWDW, GT1030-LWDW2, GT1030-LWLW, GT1030-HBD, GT1030-HBD2, GT1030-HBL, GT1030-HBDW, GT1030-HBDW2, GT1030-HBLW, GT1030-HWD, GT1030-HWD2, GT1030-HWL, GT1030-HWDW, GT1030-HWDW2, GT1030-HWLW
GT1020 Abbreviation of GT1020-LBD, GT1020-LBD2, GT1020-LBL, GT1020-LBDW, GT1020-LBDW2, GT1020-LBLW, GT1020-LWD, GT1020-LWD2, GT1020-LWL, GT1020-LWDW, GT1020-LWDW2, GT1020-LWLW
GT10 Abbreviation of GT105 , GT104 , GT1030, GT1020
A - 18
Communication unit
*1 A9GT-QJ71LP23 + GT15-75IF900 set *2 A9GT-QJ71BR13 + GT15-75IF900 set *3 A8GT-J61BT13 + GT15-75IF900 set
Option unit
*1 GT15-CFEX + GT15-CFEXIF + GT15-C08CF set.
GOT1000 Series
Handy GOT
GT16 Handy GOT
GT1665HS-V Abbreviation of GT1665HS-VTBD
GT11 Handy GOT
GT1155HS-Q Abbreviation of GT1155HS-QSBD
GT1150HS-Q Abbreviation of GT1150HS-QLBD
GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT1000
GOT900 Series Abbreviation of GOT-A900 series, GOT-F900 series
GOT800 Series Abbreviation of GOT-800 series
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
Bus connection unit GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L
Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE
RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P, GT15-RS2T4-25P
Ethernet communication unit GT15-J71E71-100
MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13
MELSECNET/10 communication unit GT15-75J71LP23-Z*1, GT15-75J71BR13-Z*2
CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit
GT15-J71GP23-SX
CC-Link IE Field Network Communication Unit GT15-J71GF13-T2
CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13, GT15-75J61BT13-Z*3
CC-Link interface unit GT11HS-CCL, GT11H-CCL
Interface converter unit GT15-75IF900
Serial multi-drop connection unit GT01-RS4-M
Connection Conversion Adapter GT10-9PT5S
RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter GT14-RS2T4-9P
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
Printer unit GT15-PRN
Video/RGB unit
Video input unit GT16M-V4, GT15V-75V4
RGB input unit GT16M-R2, GT15V-75R1
Video/RGB input unit GT16M-V4R1, GT15V-75V4R1
RGB output unit GT16M-ROUT, GT15V-75ROUT
Multimedia unit GT16M-MMR
CF card unit GT15-CFCD
CF card extension unit*1 GT15-CFEX-C08SET
External I/O unit GT15-DIO, GT15-DIOR
Sound output unit GT15-SOUT, GT11-50BAT
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
A - 19
Option
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
Memory card CF card
GT05-MEM-16MC, GT05-MEM-32MC, GT05-MEM-64MC, GT05-MEM-128MC, GT05-MEM-256MC, GT05-MEM-512MC, GT05-MEM-1GC, GT05-MEM-2GC, GT05-MEM-4GC, GT05-MEM-8GC, GT05-MEM-16GC
SD card L1MEM-2GBSD, L1MEM-4GBSD
Memory card adaptor GT05-MEM-ADPC
Option function board GT16-MESB, GT15-FNB, GT15-QFNB, GT15-QFNB16M, GT15-QFNB32M, GT15-QFNB48M, GT15-MESB48M, GT11-50FNB
Battery GT15-BAT, GT11-50BAT
Protective Sheet
For GT16
GT16-90PSCB, GT16-90PSGB, GT16-90PSCW, GT16-90PSGW, GT16-80PSCB, GT16-80PSGB, GT16-80PSCW, GT16-80PSGW, GT16-70PSCB, GT16-70PSGB, GT16-70PSCW, GT16-70PSGW, GT16-60PSCB, GT16-60PSGB, GT16-60PSCW, GT16-60PSGW, GT16-50PSCB, GT16-50PSGB, GT16-50PSCW, GT16-50PSGW, GT16-90PSCB-012, GT16-80PSCB-012, GT16-70PSCB-012, GT16-60PSCB-012, GT16-50PSCB-012, GT16H-60PSC
For GT15
GT15-90PSCB, GT15-90PSGB, GT15-90PSCW, GT15-90PSGW, GT15-80PSCB, GT15-80PSGB, GT15-80PSCW, GT15-80PSGW, GT15-70PSCB, GT15-70PSGB, GT15-70PSCW, GT15-70PSGW, GT15-60PSCB, GT15-60PSGB, GT15-60PSCW, GT15-60PSGW, GT15-50PSCB, GT15-50PSGB, GT15-50PSCW, GT15-50PSGW
For GT14 GT14-50PSCB, GT14-50PSGB, GT14-50PSCW, GT14-50PSGW
For GT12 GT11-70PSCB, GT11-65PSCB
For GT11 GT11-50PSCB, GT11-50PSGB, GT11-50PSCW, GT11-50PSGW, GT11H-50PSC
For GT10
GT10-50PSCB, GT10-50PSGB, GT10-50PSCW, GT10-50PSGW, GT10-40PSCB, GT10-40PSGB, GT10-40PSCW, GT10-40PSGW, GT10-30PSCB, GT10-30PSGB, GT10-30PSCW, GT10-30PSGW, GT10-20PSCB, GT10-20PSGB, GT10-20PSCW, GT10-20PSGW
Protective cover for oil GT05-90PCO, GT05-80PCO, GT05-70PCO, GT05-60PCO, GT05-50PCO, GT16-50PCO, GT10-40PCO, GT10-30PCO, GT10-20PCO
USB environmental protection cover GT16-UCOV, GT16-50UCOV, GT15-UCOV, GT14-50UCOV, GT11-50UCOV
Stand GT15-90STAND, GT15-80STAND, GT15-70STAND, A9GT-50STAND, GT05-50STAND
Attachment GT15-70ATT-98, GT15-70ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-97, GT15-60ATT-96, GT15-60ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-77, GT15-50ATT-95W, GT15-50ATT-85
Backlight GT16-90XLTT, GT16-80SLTT, GT16-70SLTT, GT16-70VLTT, GT16-70VLTTA, GT16-70VLTN, GT16-60SLTT, GT16-60VLTT, GT16-60VLTN, GT15-90XLTT, GT15-80SLTT, GT15-70SLTT, GT15-70VLTT, GT15-70VLTN, GT15-60VLTT, GT15-60VLTN
Multi-color display board GT15-XHNB, GT15-VHNB
Connector conversion box GT11H-CNB-37S, GT16H-CNB-42S
Emergency stop sw guard cover GT11H-50ESCOV, GT16H-60ESCOV
Memory loader GT10-LDR
Memory board GT10-50FMB
Panel-mounted USB port extension GT14-C10EXUSB-4S, GT10-C10EXUSB-5S
A - 20
Software
License key (for GT SoftGOT1000)
License key (for GT SoftGOT2)
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
GT Works3 Abbreviation of the SW DNC-GTWK3-E and SW DNC-GTWK3-EA
GT Designer3 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer3 for GOT1000 series
GT Simulator3 Abbreviation of screen simulator GT Simulator3 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT1000
GT Converter2 Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
GT Designer2 Classic Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 Classic for GOT900 series
GT Designer2 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
iQ Works Abbreviation of iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works
MELSOFT Navigator Generic term for integrated development environment software included in the SW DNC-IQWK (iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works)
GX Works2 Abbreviation of SW DNC-GXW2-E and SW DNC-GXW2-EA type programmable controller engineering software
GX Simulator2 Abbreviation of GX Works2 with the simulation function
GX Simulator Abbreviation of SW D5C-LLT-E(-EV) type ladder logic test tool function software packages (SW5D5C-LLT (-EV) or later versions)
GX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C-GPPW-E(-EV)/SW D5F-GPPW-E type software package
GX LogViewer Abbreviation of SW DNN-VIEWER-E type software package
PX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C-FBDQ-E type FBD software package for process control
MT Works2 Abbreviation of motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2 (SW DNC-MTW2-E)
MT Developer Abbreviation of SW RNC-GSV type integrated start-up support software for motion controller Q series
MR Configurator2 Abbreviation of SW DNC-MRC2-E type Servo Configuration Software
MR Configurator Abbreviation of MRZJW -SETUP E type Servo Configuration Software
FR Configurator Abbreviation of Inverter Setup Software (FR-SW -SETUP-WE)
NC Configurator Abbreviation of CNC parameter setting support tool NC Configurator
FX Configurator-FP Abbreviation of parameter setting, monitoring, and testing software packages for FX3U-20SSC-H (SW D5C-FXSSC-E)
FX3U-ENET-L Configuration tool Abbreviation of FX3U-ENET-L type Ethernet module setting software (SW1D5-FXENETL-E)
RT ToolBox2 Abbreviation of robot program creation software (3D-11C-WINE)
MX Component Abbreviation of MX Component Version (SW D5C-ACT-E,SW D5C-ACT-EA)
MX Sheet Abbreviation of MX Sheet Version (SW D5C-SHEET-E,SW D5C-SHEET-EA)
LCPU Logging Configuration Tool Abbreviation of LCPU Logging Configuration Tool (SW1DNN-LLUTL-E)
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
License GT15-SGTKEY-U, GT15-SGTKEY-P
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
License key A9GTSOFT-LKEY-P (For DOS/V PC)
License key FD SW5D5F-SGLKEY-J (For PC CPU module)
A - 21
Others
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
IAI Abbreviation of IAI Corporation
AZBIL Abbreviation of Azbil Corporation (former Yamatake Corporation)
OMRON Abbreviation of OMRON Corporation
KEYENCE Abbreviation of KEYENCE CORPORATION
KOYO EI Abbreviation of KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
SHARP Abbreviation of Sharp Manufacturing Systems Corporation
JTEKT Abbreviation of JTEKT Corporation
SHINKO Abbreviation of Shinko Technos Co., Ltd.
CHINO Abbreviation of CHINO CORPORATION
TOSHIBA Abbreviation of TOSHIBA CORPORATION
TOSHIBA MACHINE Abbreviation of TOSHIBA MACHINE CO., LTD.
HITACHI IES Abbreviation of Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.
HITACHI Abbreviation of Hitachi, Ltd.
FUJI Abbreviation of FUJI ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
PANASONIC Abbreviation of Panasonic Corporation
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX Abbreviation of Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.
YASKAWA Abbreviation of YASKAWA Electric Corporation
YOKOGAWA Abbreviation of Yokogawa Electric Corporation
ALLEN-BRADLEY Abbreviation of Allen-Bradley products manufactured by Rockwell Automation, Inc.
GE Abbreviation of GE Intelligent Platforms
LS IS Abbreviation of LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.
SCHNEIDER Abbreviation of Schneider Electric SA
SICK Abbreviation of SICK AG
SIEMENS Abbreviation of Siemens AG
RKC Abbreviation of RKC INSTRUMENT INC.
HIRATA Abbreviation of Hirata Corporation
MURATEC Abbreviation of Muratec products manufactured by Muratec Automation Co., Ltd.
PLC Abbreviation of programmable controller
Temperature controller Generic term for temperature controller manufactured by each corporation
Indicating controller Generic term for indicating controller manufactured by each corporation
Control equipment Generic term for control equipment manufactured by each corporation
CHINO controller Abbreviation of indicating controller manufactured by CHINO CORPORATION
PC CPU module Abbreviation of PC CPU Unit manufactured by CONTEC CO., LTD
GOT (server) Abbreviation of GOTs that use the server function
GOT (client) Abbreviation of GOTs that use the client function
Windows font Abbreviation of TrueType font and OpenType font available for Windows
(Differs from the True Type fonts settable with GT Designer3)
Intelligent function module Indicates the modules other than the PLC CPU, power supply module and I/O module that are mounted to the base unit
MODBUS/RTU Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a serial communication
MODBUS/TCP Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a TCP/IP network
A - 22
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Following symbols are used in this manual
* The above is different from the actual page, as it is provided for explanation only.
POINT
HINT
Refers to information required for operation.
Refers to information useful for operation.
Shows the operation steps. Operate the steps from the step 1.
: Shows the setting item displayed on the software screen or the GOT screen.
[ ]
: Refers to a button displayed on the computer screen or the GOT screen, or a key of the computer keyboard.
Show the items including detailed explanation Hardware GT16 Users Manual (Hardware) Basic Utility GT16 Users Manual (Basic Utility
A - 23
PACKING LIST
After unpacking, confirm that the following parts are included.
Model Product Quantity
GT1695M-X
GOT 1
Battery 1
Installation fitting 8
GT16 General Description 1
GT1685M-S GT1675M-S GT1675M-V GT1675-VN GT1672-VN GT1665M-S GT1665M-V GT1662-VN
GOT 1
Battery 1
Installation fitting 4
GT16 General Description 1
GT1655-V
GOT 1
Battery 1
Installation fitting 4
GT16 General Description 1
A - 24
1
O VE
RV IE
W
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
1. OVERVIEW
About GOT GOT is installed on the panel surface of control panel or operating panel and connects to the PLC in the control panel. GOT carries out switch operation, lamp display, data display, and message display etc.
For display screen, two kinds of display screens, user-created screen and utility screen are available.
(1) User-created Screen User screen is a screen drawn by GT Designer3 or GT Designer2. The objects of "Touch switch", "Lamp display", "Comment display", and "Numeric display" can be laid out arbitrarily to be displayed. Moreover, the multiple screens created by GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 can be overlapped and switched to be displayed.
For details, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual
(2) Utility Screen Utility screen is a screen prepared beforehand for GOT. Installing BootOS and standard OS in the GOT from GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 enables utility screen displaying. The utility screen has menus as [Brightness/contrast adjustment screen] and [GOT memory check screen] etc.
For details, refer to the following.
(Basic Utility) 1 to 6
PLC
Connector for
program
GOT
1 - 1
1.1 Features (1) Improved monitoring performance and connectivity to FA devices
GT1695M-X, GT1685M-S, GT1675M-S, GT1675M-V, GT1665M-S, GT1665M-V, GT1655-V: The TFT color liquid crystal display (high intensity, wide angle view, and high definition type) provides clear full-color display and displays small characters clearly. (Displays digital images of BMP and other formats in 65536 colors.) GT1675-VN, GT1672-VN, GT1662-VN: The TFT color liquid crystal display provides 4096 or 16 colors to offer a wide range of models that meet user requirements.
Provides multi-language display function based on Unicode2.1 True Type font and high-speed drawing of beautiful text.
High speed monitoring through high speed communication at maximum of 115.2kbps. High speed display and high speed touch switch response. The operation performance is improved by the analog touch panel. GT1695M-X, GT1685M-S, GT1675M-S, GT1675M-V, GT1665M-S, GT1665M-V: Applicable to a video/RGB
unit and a multimedia unit.
(2) More efficient GOT operations including screen design, startup, adjustment, management and maintenance works GT1695M-X, GT1685M-S, GT1675M-S, GT1675M-V, GT1665M-S, GT1665M-V, GT1655-V: 15MB user
memory is included as standard. GT1675-VN, GT1672-VN, GT1662-VN: 11MB user memory is included as standard.
The RS-232 interface is included as standard. The RS-422/485 interface is included as standard. The CF card interface is included as standard. The Ethernet interface is included as standard. Font installation is available to increase the system fonts. Combined use of 4 types of alarms (system alarm, user alarm, alarm history, alarm popup display) realizes
more efficient alarm notification. Maintenance timing report function is available that measures the backlight energization time and notifies of
maintenance time. The USB interface is positioned on the GOT front. This enables the system startup to be performed more
efficiently using FA device startup tool, and eliminates the necessity of indirect works (opening and closing the control panel, cable replacement, cable rewiring) in order to improve the working efficiency.
The blown backlight bulb can be confirmed even during screen saving, with the blinked POWER LED at backlight shutoff detection.
(3) Enhanced support of FA device setup tools Transferring and monitoring sequence programs with the personal computer connected to the GOT can be
executed when connecting to a PLC CPU with the direct CPU connection or bus connection. (FA transparent function)
1 - 2 1.1 Features
1
O VE
RV IE
W
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
1.2 Rough Pre-operation Procedure The outline procedure before operating GOT is shown.
Start
Create project data.
Check the Communication settings.
End
Refer to GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used or GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2/GT Works2
Insert the CF card in the PC. Insert the CF card in the PC.
Install GT Works3 or GT Designer2 in the PC.
Wire for the GOT power supply.
Mount the option function board. (As necessary)
Refer to GT Works3 Version1 Installation Instructions or GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual
Refer to GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) or GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual
When transferring data from PC to built-in flash memory and starting GOT with built-in flash memory.
When transferring data from CF card to built-in flash memory and starting GOT with built-in flash memory.
When transferring data to CF card and starting GOT with CF card.
Connect GOT and PC with a USB cable or RS-232 cable.
Transfer the OS and project data to be installed on the GOT from the PC to the GOT. 1) Install standard monitor OS, communication driver, extended function OS, option OS to the GOT.
After installation is completed, the GOT automatically restarts.
2) Download the project data created by the PC. *1
Write the OS and project data to be installed on the GOT from the PC to the CF card. 1) Write the standard monitor OS, communication driver, extended function OS, option OS, project data in the CF card.
Write the OS and project data to be installed on the GOT from the PC to the CF card. 1) Set the OS boot drive to [A: Standard CF Card]. *2 2) Write the standard monitor OS, communication driver, option OS, extended function OS, project data, and special data into the CF card.
Refer to GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) or GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/ Data Transfer Manual
Refer to GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility) Chapter 7 INSTALLATION OF COREOS, BOOTOS AND STANDARD OS in this manual for the operations of GOT.
Check that the CF card access switch is off, and insert the CF card into the GOT.
Turn on the CF card access switch, and then install or download the standard monitor OS, communication driver, option OS, extended function OS, and project data.
Check that the CF card access switch is off, and insert the CF card into the GOT.
Mount units to GOT.
Connect the GOT and controller with a cable.
Turn on the power supply of GOT and the system of the connection destination.
Start the monitor.
Turn on the CF card access switch.
( 7. WIRING)
( 8. OPTION)
( 8. OPTION)
1.2 Rough Pre-operation Procedure 1 - 3
* 1 By connecting with the Ethernet interface included as standard in GT 16, project data can be downloaded/uploaded. For download/upload of project data with the Ethernet connection, BootOS and standard monitor OS should be installed in the GOT in advance so that the GOT and PC can communicate with each other via Ethernet by setting Communication Settings. Refer to the following manual for details.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (Chapter 8 COMMUNICATION WITH GOT) GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (Chapter 8 TRANSFERRING DATA)
* 2 The B drive or E drive cannot be set as the OS boot drive.
POINT
Precautions for setting OS boot drive to [A: Standard CF Card] (1) GOT startup time
When the OS boot drive is set to [A: Standard CF Card], the GOT startup time with the A drive takes longer than that with the C drive. The GOT startup time with the A drive differs depending on the CF card type, the numbers of extended function OSs and option OSs, and project data size.
(2) Handling CF card during booting OS Do not remove the CF card and do not turn off the CF card access switch during booting the OS. Doing so causes the boot to fail. As a result, the GOT does not start correctly.
(3) Corrective actions when OS cannot be booted The OS cannot be booted in the following conditions. Take the following corrective actions, and then boot the OS again.
Condition Corrective action
The type of the GOT to be used differs from the GOT type data set with GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 stored in the CF card.
Prepare the CF card where the OSs and project data of the same GOT type as the GOT to be used are written.
The GOT has insufficient memory.
Delete unnecessary data stored in the memory of GOT. For details, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)
GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual
The CF card access switch is off. Turn on the CF card access switch.
1 - 4 1.2 Rough Pre-operation Procedure
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2.1 Overall Configuration The overall configuration of GOT is as follows. For the connection methods applicable to GOT1000 series and cable, refer to the following.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2/GT Works2
Protective cover for oil
Personal computer (Commercially available)
RFID controller (Commercially available)
USB mouse (Commercially available)
USB keyboard (Commercially available)
Bar code reader (Commercially available)
CF card
USB memory
Option function board
Extension unit
RS-422 conversion unit
RS-422/485 conversion cable
CF card Memory card adaptor
Memory card
Protective sheet
Stand
Battery
Refer to 8.1
Refer to 8.5.1
Refer to 8.3.1
Refer to 8.4.1
Refer to 8.3.1
Refer to 8.3.1
Refer to 8.3.1
Refer to 8.4.1
Refer to 8.3.1
Refer to 8.3.1
Refer to 8.3.1
Refer to 8.5.1
Refer to 8.5.1
Refer to 8.5.1
Refer to 8.5.1
2.1 Overall Configuratio
2.2 Component List (1) Explanation of the GOT model name
*1 refer to the following for 65536 color GOT.
3.2 Performance Specifications
(2) Explanation of the option model name
Power type
GOT1000 series GT16/GT15/GT11/GT10
B : Black
X : 1024 x 768(XGA) S : 800 x 600(SVGA) V : 640 x 480(VGA)
A : 100 to 240VAC D : 24VDC
Resolution
9 : 15" 8 : 12.1" 7 : 10.4" 6 : 8.4" 5 : 5.7"
Screen size type
Panel color type
Display device type
Model type
Dedicated type
T : TFT color (High intensity, Wide angle view) N : TFT color
M : Multimedia compliant (Non) : Multimedia non-compliant
5 : 65536 colors or 4096 colors *1 2 : 16 colors
G T 1 6 5 M
G T
(None) : Common for all types
90 : Dedicated for 15"
80 : Dedicated for 12.1"
75 : Common for 15", 12.1"
70 : Dedicated for 10.4"
60 : Dedicated for 8.4"
50 : Dedicated for 5.7"
16M : Multimedia compliant model
16 : Dedicated for 16
15 : Common for GT16/GT15,
(Partially dedicated for GT15)
11 : Dedicated for GT11
(Partially common for GT16/GT15/GT11)
09 :
05 : Common for GT16/GT15/GT11
01 :
2 - 2 2.2 Component List
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
(3) Third party PLC connection cable
Connector pin type of the connection target (For third party PLC side)
Application classification (For GOT1000 side)
Third party PLC connection cable (Commonly used for GT16, GT15 and GT11)
G T 0 9 C n
P: Plug (male) S: Socket (female) T: Solderless terminal C: Preparatory soldering
Number of connector pins (Indicates the number of terminals for solderless or preparatory-soldered terminals.)
Example) Wirings are different for each PLC type. Connecting targets are different, such as servo, inverter, temperature controller.
Cable distinction numbers for one manufacturer's products (Two-digit sequence number: 01, 02, ...) * When cable distinction is needed for one manufacture's products
Cable classification
R2: For RS232 communication R4: For RS422 communication
Length classification * Indicated in 10cm unit. Example) 3m : 30 30m: 300
01: For OMRON PLC 02: For YASKAWA PLC 03: For YOKOGAWA PLC 04: For HITACHI IEC PLC 05: For TOSHIBA PLC 06: For SHARP PLC 07: For ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC 08: For SIEMENS PLC 09: For PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNXPLC 10: For FUJI PLC 11: For KEYENCE PLC 12: For JTEKT PLC 13: For HITACHI PLC
2.2 Component List 2 - 3
2.2.1 GOT
Product name
Model name Specifications
GOT
GT1695M-XTBA 15" (1024 768 dots), TFT color liquid crystal, (high intensity, wide angle view), 65536 colors, video/RGB, multimedia compliant, 100 to 240VAC, Memory size 15MB
GT1695M-XTBD 15" (1024 768 dots), TFT color liquid crystal, (high intensity, wide angle view), 65536 colors, video/RGB, multimedia compliant, 24VDC, Memory size 15MB
GT1685M-STBA 12.1" (800 600 dots), TFT color liquid crystal, (high intensity, wide angle view), 65536 colors, video/RGB, multimedia compliant, 100 to 240VAC, Memory size 15MB
GT1685M-STBD 12.1" (800 600 dots), TFT color liquid crystal, (high intensity, wide angle view), 65536 colors, video/RGB, multimedia compliant, 24VDC, Memory size 15MB
GT1675M-STBA 10.4" (800 600 dots), TFT color liquid crystal, (high intensity, wide angle view), 65536 colors, video/RGB, multimedia compliant, 100 to 240VAC, Memory size 15MB
GT1675M-STBD 10.4" (800 600 dots), TFT color liquid crystal, (high intensity, wide angle view), 65536 colors, video/RGB, multimedia compliant, 24VDC, Memory size 15MB
GT1675M-VTBA 10.4" (640 480 dots), TFT color liquid crystal, (high intensity, wide angle view), 65536 colors, video/RGB, multimedia compliant, 100 to 240VAC, Memory size 15MB
GT1675M-VTBD 10.4" (640 480 dots), TFT color liquid crystal, (high intensity, wide angle view), 65536 colors, video/RGB, multimedia compliant, 24VDC, Memory size 15MB
GT1675-VNBA 10.4" (640 480 dots), TFT color liquid crystal, 4096 colors, 100 to 240VAC, Memory size 11MB
GT1675-VNBD 10.4" (640 480 dots), TFT color liquid crystal, 4096 colors, 24VDC, Memory size 11MB
GT1672-VNBA 10.4" (640 480 dots), TFT color liquid crystal, 16 colors, 100 to 240VAC, Memory size 11MB
GT1672-VNBD 10.4" (640 480 dots), TFT color liquid crystal, 16 colors, 24VDC, Memory size 11MB
GT1665M-STBA 8.4" (800 600 dots), TFT color liquid crystal, (high intensity, wide angle view), 65536 colors, video/RGB, multimedia compliant, 100 to 240VAC, Memory size 15MB
GT1665M-STBD 8.4" (800 600 dots), TFT color liquid crystal, (high intensity, wide angle view), 65536 colors, video/RGB, multimedia compliant, 24VDC, Memory size 15MB
GT1665M-VTBA 8.4" (640 480 dots), TFT color liquid crystal, (high intensity, wide angle view), 65536 colors, video/RGB, multimedia compliant, 100 to 240VAC, Memory size 15MB
GT1665M-VTBD 8.4" (640 480 dots), TFT color liquid crystal, (high intensity, wide angle view), 65536 colors, video/RGB, multimedia compliant, 24VDC, Memory size 15MB
GT1662-VNBA 8.4" (640 480 dots), TFT color liquid crystal, 16 colors, 100 to 240VAC, Memory size 11MB
GT1662-VNBD 8.4" (640 480 dots), TFT color liquid crystal, 16 colors, 24VDC, Memory size 11MB
GT1655-VTBD 5.7" (640 480 dots), TFT color liquid crystal, (high intensity, wide angle view), 65536 colors, 24VDC, Memory size 15MB
2 - 4 2.2 Component List
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
2.2.2 Option
Communication unit (Sold separately) Product name Model name Description
Bus connection unit
GT15-QBUS For QCPU (Q Mode)/Motion controller CPU (Q Series) connection (standard model)
For last GOT, Number of IN side connectors: 1
GT15-QBUS2 For intermediary and last GOT, Number of IN and OUT side connectors: 1 for each side
GT15-ABUS For A/QnACPU/Motion controller CPU (A Series) connection (standard model)
For last GOT, Number of IN side connectors: 1
GT15-ABUS2 For intermediary and last GOT, Number of IN and OUT side connectors: 1 for each side
GT15-75QBUSL For QCPU (Q Mode)/Motion controller CPU (Q Series) connection (slim model)
For last GOT, Number of IN side connectors: 1
GT15-75QBUS2L For intermediary and last GOT, Number of IN and OUT side connectors: 1 for each side
GT15-75ABUSL For A/QnACPU/Motion controller CPU (A Series) connection (slim model)
For last GOT, Number of IN side connectors: 1
GT15-75ABUS2L For intermediary and last GOT, Number of IN and OUT side connectors: 1 for each side
Serial communication unit
GT15-RS2-9P For RS-232 interface connection, connector type
GT15-RS4-9S For RS-422 interface connection, connector type
GT15-RS4-TE For RS-422 interface connection, terminal block type
MELSECNET/H communication unit
GT15-J71LP23-25 Optical double loop unit
GT15-J71BR13 Coaxial bus unit
CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit
GT15-J71GP23-SX Optical loop unit
CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit
GT15-J71GF13-T2 Intelligent device station unit
CC-Link communication unit
GT15-J61BT13 Intelligent device station unit CC-LINK Ver. 2 compliant
Serial multi-drop connection unit
GT01-RS4-M GOT multidrop connection unit
2.2 Component List 2 - 5
QCPU (Q Mode) bus connection cable (Sold separately)
QnA/ACPU/Motion controller (A series) bus connection cable (Sold separately)
(Continued to next page)
Product name Model name Description
Q extension cable GOT-to-GOT connection cable
GT15-QC06B Cable length 0.6m
For connecting QCPU and GOT For connecting GOT and GOT
GT15-QC12B Cable length 1.2m
GT15-QC30B Cable length 3m
GT15-QC50B Cable length 5m
GT15-QC100B Cable length 10m
Q long distance connection cable GOT-to-GOT long distance connection cable
GT15-QC150BS Cable length 15m
For long distance connection (13.2m or longer) of QCPU and GOT (A9GT-QCNB is necessary) For long distance connection of GOT and GOT
GT15-QC200BS Cable length 20m
GT15-QC250BS Cable length 25m
GT15-QC300BS Cable length 30m
GT15-QC350BS Cable length 35m
Product name Model name Description
Small-size CPU extension cable GOT-to-GOT connection cable
GT15-A1SC07B Cable length 0.7m For connecting QnAS/AnSCPU/Motion controller CPU (A series) and GOT
GT15-A1SC12B Cable length 1.2m
GT15-A1SC30B Cable length 3m
GT15-A1SC50B Cable length 5m For connecting QnAS/AnSCPU and GOT
GT15-A1SC05NB Cable length 0.45m For connecting QnAS/AnSCPU/motion controller CPU (A series) and A7GT-CNB
GT15-A1SC07NB Cable length 0.7m
GT15-A1SC30NB Cable length 3m
GT15-A1SC50NB Cable length 5m For connecting QnAS/AnSCPU and A7GT-CNB
Large-size CPU extension cable
GT15-C12NB Cable length 1.2m For connecting QnA/ACPU/Motion controller CPU (A series /Extension base) and GOT
GT15-C30NB Cable length 3m
GT15-C50NB Cable length 5m
GT15-AC06B Cable length 0.6m
For connecting QnA/ACPU/Motion controller CPU (A series /Extension base) and A7GT-CNB
GT15-AC12B Cable length 1.2m
GT15-AC30B Cable length 3m
GT15-AC50B Cable length 5m
GT15-A370C12B-S1 Cable length 1.2m For connecting Motion controller CPU (A series / Extension base) and GOTGT15-A370C25B-S1 Cable length 2.5m
GT15-A370C12B Cable length 1.2m For connecting Motion controller CPU (A series / Extension base) and A7GT-CNBGT15-A370C25B Cable length 2.5m
Small-size CPU long distance connection cable
GT15-C100EXSS-1 Cable length 10.6m For long distance connection of QnAS/AnSCPU/motion controller CPU (A series) and GOT For connecting A7GT-CNB and a combined product of the GT15-EXCNB and GT15-C BS (for long distance connection)
GT15-C200EXSS-1 Cable length 20.6m
GT15-C300EXSS-1 Cable length 30.6m
GOT-to-GOT connection cable
GT15-C07BS Cable length 0.7m
For connecting GOT and GOT GT15-C12BS Cable length 1.2m
GT15-C30BS Cable length 3m
GT15-C50BS Cable length 5m
2 - 6 2.2 Component List
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
Connection cables for MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLCs (Sold separately)
Product name Model name Description
GOT-to-GOT long distance connection cable
GT15-C100BS Cable length 10m
For connecting GOT and GOTGT15-C200BS Cable length 20m
GT15-C300BS Cable length 30m
A0J2HCPU connection cable
GT15-J2C10B Cable length 1m For connecting A0J2HCPU power supply module (A0J2- PW) and GOT
Buffer circuit cable GT15-EXCNB Cable length 0.5m Combined with GT15-C BS, can be used as GT15-
C EXSS-1
Product name Model name Description
RS-232 cable
Q/LCPU direct connection cable
GT01-C30R2-6P Cable length 3m For connecting Q/LCPU and GOT
FX communication function extension board connection cable, FX communication function adapter connection cable, data transfer cable
GT01-C30R2-9S Cable length 3m
For connecting FXCPU communication expansion board (D-sub 9 pins connector), FXCPU communication special adapter (D-sub 9 pins connector) and GOT For connecting personal computer (Drawing software) (D-sub 9 pins: female) and GOT (D-sub 9 pins: female)
FX communication function adaptor connection cable
GT01-C30R2-25P Cable length 3m For connecting FXCPU communcation special adaptor (D-sub 25 pins connector) and GOT
Computer link connection cable
GT09-C30R2-9P Cable length 3 m For connecting computer link module/serial communication module and GOT
GT09-C30R2-25P Cable length 3 m
RS-422 cable
FXCPU direct connection cable, FX communication function extension board connection cable
GT01-C10R4-8P Cable length 1m
For connecting FXCPU (MINI DIN 8 pins connector) and GOT For connecting FXCPU communication expansion board (MINI DIN 8 pins connector) and GOT
GT01-C30R4-8P Cable length 3m
GT01-C100R4-8P Cable length 10m
GT01-C200R4-8P Cable length 20m
GT01-C300R4-8P Cable length 30m
QnA/A/FXCPU direct connection cable, computer link connection cable
GT01-C30R4-25P Cable length 3m For connecting QnA/ACPU/Motion controller CPU (A series)/FXCPU (D-sub 25 pins connector) and GOT For connecting FA-CNV CBL and GOT For connecting computer link module/serial communication module and GOT
GT01-C100R4-25P Cable length 10m
GT01-C200R4-25P Cable length 20m
GT01-C300R4-25P Cable length 30m
Computer link connection cable
GT09-C30R4-6C Cable length 3 m
For connecting computer link module/serial communication module and GOT
GT09-C100R4-6C Cable length 10 m
GT09-C200R4-6C Cable length 20 m
GT09-C300R4-6C Cable length 30 m
2.2 Component List 2 - 7
Connection cables for OMRON PLCs (Sold separately)
Connection cables for KEYENCE PLCs (Sold separately)
Product name
Model name Description
RS-232 cable
GT09-C30R20101-9P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to OMRON PLC, serial communication module, communication board, serial communication board
GT09-C30R20102-25S Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to OMRON connection cable
GT09-C30R20103-25P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to OMRON rack type host link unit
RS-422 cable
GT09-C30R40101-9P Cable length 3m
For connecting GOT to OMRON PLC, serial communication module, serial communication board
GT09-C100R40101-9P Cable length 10m
GT09-C200R40101-9P Cable length 20m
GT09-C300R40101-9P Cable length 30m
GT09-C30R40102-9P Cable length 3m
For connecting GOT to OMRON rack type host link unit, communication board
GT09-C100R40102-9P Cable length 10m
GT09-C200R40102-9P Cable length 20m
GT09-C300R40102-9P Cable length 30m
GT09-C30R40103-5T Cable length 3m
For connecting GOT to OMRON communication board (CP1W- CIF11)
GT09-C100R40103-5T Cable length 10m
GT09-C200R40103-5T Cable length 20m
GT09-C300R40103-5T Cable length 30m
Product name
Model name Description
RS-232 cable
GT09-C30R21101-6P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to KEYENCE PLC
GT09-C30R21102-9S Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to KEYENCE multi-communication unit
GT09-C30R21103-3T Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to KEYENCE multi-communication unit
RS-422 cable
GT09-C30R41101-5T Cable length 3m
For connecting GOT to KEYENCE multi-communication unit GT09-C100R41101-5T Cable length 10m
GT09-C200R41101-5T Cable length 20m
GT09-C300R41101-5T Cable length 30m
2 - 8 2.2 Component List
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
Connection cables for SHARP PLCs (Sold separately)
Connection cables for JTEKT PLCs (Sold separately)
Connection cables for SHINKO indicating controller (Sold separately)
Product name
Model name Description
RS-232 cable
GT09-C30R20601-15P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to SHARP PLC
GT09-C30R20602-15P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to SHARP PLC
RS-422 cable
GT09-C30R40601-15P Cable length 3m
For connecting GOT to SHARP PLC GT09-C100R40601-15P Cable length 10m
GT09-C200R40601-15P Cable length 20m
GT09-C300R40601-15P Cable length 30m
GT09-C30R40602-15P Cable length 3m
For connecting GOT to SHARP PLC GT09-C100R40602-15P Cable length 10m
GT09-C200R40602-15P Cable length 20m
GT09-C300R40602-15P Cable length 30m
GT09-C30R40603-6T Cable length 3m
For connecting GOT to SHARP link unit GT09-C100R40603-6T Cable length 10m
GT09-C200R40603-6T Cable length 20m
GT09-C300R40603-6T Cable length 30m
Product name
Model name Description
RS-232 cable
GT09-C30R21201-25P Cable length 3 m For connecting GOT to JTEKT PLC
RS-422 cable
GT09-C30R41201-6C Cable length 3 m
For connecting GOT to JTEKT PLC GT09-C100R41201-6C Cable length 10 m
GT09-C200R41201-6C Cable length 20 m
GT09-C300R41201-6C Cable length 30 m
Product name
Model name Description
RS-232 cable
GT09-C30R21401-4T Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to SHINKO indicating controller (FCR-100/ FCD100/FCR-23A/PC-/FIR series)
2.2 Component List 2 - 9
Connection cables for TOSHIBA PLCs (Sold separately)
Connection cables for HITACHI IES PLCs (Sold separately)
Connection cables for HITACHI PLCs (Sold separately)
Product name
Model name Description
RS-232 cable
GT09-C30R20501-9P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC
GT09-C30R20502-15P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC
RS-422 cable
GT09-C30R40501-15P Cable length 3m
For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC GT09-C100R40501-15P Cable length 10m
GT09-C200R40501-15P Cable length 20m
GT09-C300R40501-15P Cable length 30m
GT09-C30R40502-6C Cable length 3m
For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC GT09-C100R40502-6C Cable length 10m
GT09-C200R40502-6C Cable length 20m
GT09-C300R40502-6C Cable length 30m
GT09-C30R40503-15P Cable length 3m
For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC GT09-C100R40503-15P Cable length 10m
GT09-C200R40503-15P Cable length 20m
GT09-C300R40503-15P Cable length 30m
Product name
Model name Description
RS-232 cable
GT09-C30R20401-15P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to HITACHI IES PLC, intelligent serial port module
GT09-C30R20402-15P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to HITACHI IES PLC
RS-422 cable
GT09-C30R40401-7T Cable length 3m
For connecting GOT to HITACHI IES intelligent serial port module GT09-C100R40401-7T Cable length 10m
GT09-C200R40401-7T Cable length 20m
GT09-C300R40401-7T Cable length 30m
Product name
Model name Description
RS-232 Cable
GT09-C30R21301-9S Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to HITACHI communication module (LQE560/ LQE060/LQE160)
RS-422 Cable
GT09-C30R41301-9S Cable length 3m
For connecting GOT to HITACHI PLC (LPQ510) and communication module (LQE565/LQE165)
GT09-C100R41301-9S Cable length 10m
GT09-C200R41301-9S Cable length 20m
GT09-C300R41301-9S Cable length 30m
2 - 10 2.2 Component List
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
Connection cables for FUJI PLCs (Sold separately)
Connection cables for PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLCs (Sold separately)
Connection cables for YASKAWA PLCs (Sold separately)
Product name
Model name Description
RS-232 Cable
GT09-C30R21003-25P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to FUJI RS-232C interface card (NV1L-RS2), RS-232C/485 interface capsule (FFK120A-C10), and general- purpose interface module (NC1L-RS2/FFU120B)
RS-422 Cable
GT09-C30R41001-6T Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to FUJI RS-232C/485 interface capsule (FFK120A-C10) and general-purpose interface module (NC1L-RS4/ FFU120B)
GT09-C100R41001-6T Cable length 10m
GT09-C200R41001-6T Cable length 20m
GT09-C300R41001-6T Cable length 30m
Product name
Model name Description
RS-232 cable
GT09-C30R20901-25P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX RS422/232C conversion adapter
GT09-C30R20902-9P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to the tool port or RS232C port of PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC, computer communication unit
GT09-C30R20903-9P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to the RS232C port of PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC
GT09-C30R20904-3C Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to the RS232C port of PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC
Product name
Model name Description
RS-232 cable
GT09-C30R20201-9P Cable length 3m
For connecting GOT to YASKAWA PLC GT09-C30R20202-15P Cable length 3m
GT09-C30R20203-9P Cable length 3m
GT09-C30R20204-14P Cable length 3m
GT09-C30R20205-25P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to YASKAWA MEMOBUS module
RS-422 cable
GT09-C30R40201-9P Cable length 3m
For connecting GOT to YASKAWA MEMOBUS module GT09-C100R40201-9P Cable length 10m
GT09-C200R40201-9P Cable length 20m
GT09-C300R40201-9P Cable length 30m
GT09-C30R40202-14P Cable length 3m
For connecting GOT to YASKAWA PLC GT09-C100R40202-14P Cable length 10m
GT09-C200R40202-14P Cable length 20m
GT09-C300R40202-14P Cable length 30m
2.2 Component List 2 - 11
Connection cables for YOKOGAWA PLCs (Sold separately)
Connection cables for ALLEN-BRADLEY PLCs (Sold separately)
Connection cables for SIEMENS PLCs (Sold separately)
RS-422 connector conversion cable (Sold separately)
Product name
Model name Description
RS-232 cable
GT09-C30R20301-9P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA CPU port/D-Sub 9-pin conversion cable
GT09-C30R20302-9P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA PC link module
GT09-C30R20304-9S Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA converter (ML2- )
GT09-C30R20305-9S Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA PLC
RS-422 cable
GT09-C30R40301-6T Cable length 3m
For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA PC link module
GT09-C100R40301-6T Cable length 10m
GT09-C200R40301-6T Cable length 20m
GT09-C300R40301-6T Cable length 30m
GT09-C30R40302-6T Cable length 3m
GT09-C100R40302-6T Cable length 10m
GT09-C200R40302-6T Cable length 20m
GT09-C300R40302-6T Cable length 30m
GT09-C30R40303-6T Cable length 3m
For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA temperature controller (GREEN series)
GT09-C100R40303-6T Cable length 10m
GT09-C200R40303-6T Cable length 20m
GT09-C300R40303-6T Cable length 30m
GT09-C30R40304-6T Cable length 3m
For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA temperature controller (UT2000 series)
GT09-C100R40304-6T Cable length 10m
GT09-C200R40304-6T Cable length 20m
GT09-C300R40304-6T Cable length 30m
Product name
Model name Description
RS-232 cable
GT09-C30R20701-9S Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC
Product name
Model name Description
RS-232 cable
GT09-C30R20801-9S Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to SIEMENS HMI Adapter
Product name Model name Description
RS-422 connector conversion cable
GT16-C02R4-9S RS-422/485(connector) RS-422 connector conversion cable
RS-422 side connector 9 pins
2 - 12 2.2 Component List
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
RS-485 connector terminal block conversion modules with cable (Sold separately)
RS-422 conversion unit (Sold separately)
*1 The GT1655-V cannot be used.
Bus extension connector box (Sold separately)
Bus connector conversion box (Sold separately)
CF card (Sold separately)
*1 A CF card with more than 2GB can be used for the GT16 with the following versions of OSes installed. Boot OS version: 05.09.00AF or later Standard monitor OS version: 05.09.00 or later If the above versions of OSes are not installed, install the OSes to the GOT by using GT Designer3 Version1.17T or later. If the OS version is earlier than the above OS versions, a CF card with more than 2GB is not recognized correctly. GT Designer2 Version is not supported.
*2 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable. For the validated models, refer to Technical News GOT-A-0010 "List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT1000 Series" separately available, or contact your local distributor.
Product name Model name Description
RS-485 connector terminal block conversion modules with cable
FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 Cable length 0.5m RS-422/485 connector RS-485 (terminal block) converter module with dedicated connection cable
FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 Cable length 1.0m
FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 Cable length 2.0m
Product name Model name Description
RS-422 conversion unit*1 GT15-RS2T4-9P RS-232 RS-422 conversion
unit
RS-422 side connector 9 pins
GT15-RS2T4-25P RS-422 side connector 25 pins
Product name Model name Description
Bus extension connector box
A9GT-QCNB For QCPU (Q Mode)/Motion controller CPU (Q series) long distance (13.2m or longer) bus connection
Product name Model name Description
Bus connector conversion box
A7GT-CNB For QnA/ACPU/Motion controller CPU (A series) long distance bus connection (For conversion from large type connector to small type connector)
Product name Model name Description
CF card
GT05-MEM-16MC Flash ROM 16MB
GT05-MEM-32MC Flash ROM 32MB
GT05-MEM-64MC Flash ROM 64MB
GT05-MEM-128MC Flash ROM 128MB
GT05-MEM-256MC Flash ROM 256MB
GT05-MEM-512MC Flash ROM 512MB
GT05-MEM-1GC Flash ROM 1GB
GT05-MEM-2GC Flash ROM 2GB
GT05-MEM-4GC*1 Flash ROM 4GB
GT05-MEM-8GC*1 Flash ROM 8GB
GT05-MEM-16GC*1 Flash ROM 16GB
Commercially-available CF card *2
2.2 Component List 2 - 13
USB memory (Sold separately)
*1 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable. For the validated models, refer to Technical News GOT-A-0010 "List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT1000 Series" separately available, or contact your local distributor.
USB mouse (Sold separately)
*1 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable. For the validated models, refer to Technical News GOT-A-0010 "List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT1000 Series" separately available, or contact your local distributor.
USB keyboard (Sold separately)
*1 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable. For the validated models, refer to Technical News GOT-A-0010 "List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT1000 Series" separately available, or contact your local distributor.
Bar code reader (Sold separately)
*1 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable. For the validated models, refer to Technical News GOT-A-0010 "List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT1000 Series" separately available, or contact your local distributor.
RFID controller (Sold separately)
*1 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable. For the validated models, refer to Technical News GOT-A-0010 "List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT1000 Series" separately available, or contact your local distributor.
Memory card adaptor (Sold separately)
Option function board (Sold separately)
Product name Model name Description
USB memory Commercially-available USB memory *1
Product name Model name Description
USB mouse Commercially-available USB mouse *1
Product name Model name Description
USB keyboard Commercially-available USB keyboard *1
Product name Model name Description
Bar code reader Commercially-available bar code reader *1
Product name Model name Description
RFID controller Commercially-available RFID controller *1
Product name Model name Description
Memory card adaptor GT05-MEM-ADPC CF card to memory card (Type II) conversion adaptor
Product name Model name Description
Option function board GT16-MESB MES interface function boad
2 - 14 2.2 Component List
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
Option unit (Sold separately)
*1 The GT1675-VN, GT1672-VN, GT1662-VN, GT1655-V cannot be used.
Option unit dedicated cable (Sold separately)
*1 Included with an option unit at the time of purchase.
Stand (Sold separately)
Battery (Sold separately)
*1 Included with the main unit.
Product name Model name Description
Video input unit*1 GT16M-V4 For video input signal (NTSC format / PAL format) 4 channels
RGB input unit*1 GT16M-R2 For analog RGB input signal 2 channels
Video/RGB input unit*1 GT16M-V4R1 For video input signal (NTSC format / PAL format) 4 channels/analog RGB input signal 1 channels mixed input
RGB output unit*1 GT16M-ROUT For analog RGB output signal 1 channel
Multimedia unit*1 GT16M-MMR For video input signal (NTSC format / PAL format) 1 channel
Printer unit GT15-PRN For connecting a printer USB device (PictBridge) 1 channel
CF card unit GT15-CFCD For CF card installation (B drive)
CF card extention unit GT15-CFEX-C08SET For CF card installation (B drive)
External I/O unit
GT15-DIO For connecting an external I/O device/operation panel (Positive Common Input/ Sink Type Output)
GT15-DIOR For connecting an external I/O device/operation panel (Negative Common Input/ Source Type Output)
Sound output unit GT15-SOUT For sound output
Product name Model name Description
Dedicated printer
connection cable *1 GT09-C30USB-5P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT (USB mini) to printer (USB)
Product name Model name Description
Stand
GT15-90STAND Stand for 15"
GT15-80STAND Stand for 12.1"
GT15-70STAND Stand for 10.4"/8.4"
GT05-50STAND Stand for 5.7"
Product name Model name Description Target GOT
Battery*1 GT15-BAT Battery for clock data and maintenance report
data backups
GT1695, GT1685, GT1675, GT1672, GT1665, GT1662
GT11-50BAT GT1655
2.2 Component List 2 - 15
Protective sheet (Sold separately)
*1 The USB interface on the GOT front face cannot be used with this item.
Protective cover for oil (Sold separately)
Product name Model name Description
Protective sheet
GT16-90PSCB
15" protective sheet
Clear 5 sheets GT16-90PSGB Antiglare 5 sheets GT16-90PSCW Clear (Frame: white) 5 sheets GT16-90PSGW Antiglare (Frame: white) 5 sheets
GT16-90PSCB-012*1 Clear (covered USB environmental protection cover type) 5 sheets
GT16-80PSCB
12.1" protective sheet
Clear 5 sheets GT16-80PSGB Antiglare 5 sheets GT16-80PSCW Clear (Frame: white) 5 sheets GT16-80PSGW Antiglare (Frame: white) 5 sheets
GT16-80PSCB-012*1 Clear (covered USB environmental protection cover type) 5 sheets
GT16-70PSCB
10.4" protective sheet
Clear 5 sheets GT16-70PSGB Antiglare 5 sheets GT16-70PSCW Clear (Frame: white) 5 sheets GT16-70PSGW Antiglare (Frame: white) 5 sheets
GT16-70PSCB-012*1 Clear (covered USB environmental protection cover type) 5 sheets
GT16-60PSCB
8.4" protective sheet
Clear 5 sheets GT16-60PSGB Antiglare 5 sheets GT16-60PSCW Clear (Frame: white) 5 sheets GT16-60PSGW Antiglare (Frame: white) 5 sheets
GT16-60PSCB-012*1 Clear (covered USB environmental protection cover type) 5 sheets
GT16-50PSCB
5.7" protective sheet
Clear 5 sheets GT16-50PSGB Antiglare 5 sheets GT16-50PSCW Clear (Frame: white) 5 sheets GT16-50PSGW Antiglare (Frame: white) 5 sheets
GT16-50PSCB-012*1 Clear (covered USB environmental protection cover type) 5 sheets
Product name Model name Description
Protective cover for oil
GT05-90PCO For 15" GOT
GT05-80PCO For 12.1" GOT
GT05-70PCO For 10.4" GOT
GT05-60PCO For 8.4" GOT
GT16-50PCO For 5.7" GOT
2 - 16 2.2 Component List
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
Backlight (Sold separately)
*1 At GOT purchase, it is installed in the main unit. *2 Function version C or earlier *3 Function version D to G *4 Function version G or later
USB environmental protection cover (Sold separately)
*1 At GOT purchase, it is installed in the main body.
Attachment (Sold separately)
* 1 It can be replaced from GP250 or GP260 manufactured by Digital Electronics Corporation.
Product name Model name Description Target GOT
Backlight *1
GT16-90XLTT For 15" high intensity, wide angle view TFT (XGA) GT1695M-X*4
GT16-80SLTT For 12.1" high intensity, wide angle view TFT (SVGA) GT1685M-S*4
GT16-70SLTT For 10.4" high intensity, wide angle view TFT (SVGA) GT1675M-S*4
GT16-70VLTT For 10.4" high intensity, wide angle view TFT (VGA)
GT1675M-V*2
GT16-70VLTTA GT1675M-V*3
GT16-70VLTN For 10.4" TFT (VGA) GT1675-VN*4, GT1672-VN*4
GT16-60SLTT For 8.4" high intensity, wide angle view TFT (SVGA) GT1665M-S*4
GT16-60VLTT For 8.4" high intensity, wide angle view TFT (VGA) GT1665M-V*4
GT16-60VLTN For 8.4" TFT (VGA) GT1662-VN*4
Product name Model name Description Target GOT
USB environmental
protection cover *1 GT16-UCOV Environmental cover for USB interface on the GOT
main unit front side (For complying IP67)
GT1695, GT1685, GT1675, GT1672, GT1665, GT1662
GT16-50UCOV GT1655
Product name Model name Description
Applicable screen size Model before replacement Model after replacement
Attachment
GT15-70ATT-98
10.4"
A985GOT*1
GT1675 GT15-70ATT-87
A870GOT-SWS
A870GOT-TWS
A8GT-70GOT-TW
A8GT-70GOT-TB
A8GT-70GOT-SW
A8GT-70GOT-SB
GT15-60ATT-97
8.4"
A97 GOT
GT1665
GT15-60ATT-96 A960GOT
GT15-60ATT-87
A870GOT-EWS
A8GT-70GOT-EW
A8GT-70GOT-EB
A77GOT-EL-S5
A77GOT-EL-S3
A77GOT-EL
GT15-60ATT-77
A77GOT-CL-S5
A77GOT-CL-S3
A77GOT-CL
A77GOT-L-S5
A77GOT-L-S3
A77GOT-L
GT15-50ATT-95W 5.7"
A956WGOT GT1655
GT15-50ATT-85 A85 GOT
2.2 Component List 2 - 17
Drawing software (Sold separately)
PC connection cable (Sold separately)
Product name Model name Description
GT Works3 SW1DND-GTWK3-E Drawing software for GOT2000/GOT1000 series
GT Designer2 SW2D5C-GTD2-J Drawing software for GOT1000/GOT900 series
Product name Model name Description
Project data transfer cable
GT01-C30R2-9S Cable length 3m For connecting GOT (D sub 9-pin female) and PC (D sub 9-pin female)
GT09-C20USB-5P Cable length 2m For connecting GOT (USB mini) and PC (USB)
GT09-C30USB-5P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT (USB mini) and PC (USB)
2 - 18 2.2 Component List
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
3. SPECIFICATIONS
3.1 General Specifications
*1 When any of the following units is mounted, the maximum operating ambient temperature must be 5C lower than the one described in the general specifications. Multimedia unit (GT16M-MMR) MELSECNET/H communication unit (GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13) CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13) Protective cover for oil
*2 Do not use or store the GOT under pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure of altitude 0m (0ft.). Failure to observe this instruction may cause a malfunction. When an air purge is made inside the control panel by adding pressure, there may be a clearance between the surface sheet and the screen making it difficult to use the touch panel, or the sheet may come off.
*3 This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the public electrical power distribution network and the machinery within the premises. Category II applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities. The surge voltage withstand level for up to the raged voltage of 300 V is 2500 V.
*4 This index indicates the degree to which conductive material is generated in the environment where the equipment is used. In pollution degree 2, only non-conductive pollution occurs but temporary conductivity may be produced due to condensation.
Item Specifications
Operating ambient temperature*1
Display section 0 to 50C
Other than the display section
0 to 55C
Storage ambient temperature -20 to 60C
Operating ambient humidity 10 to 90% RH, non-condensing
Storage ambient humidity 10 to 90% RH, non-condensing
Vibration resistance Compliant with JIS B3502 and IEC61131-2
Frequency Acceleration Half-amplitude Sweep count
Under intermittent vibration
5 to 8.4Hz - 3.5mm 10 times each in X, Y and Z directions8.4 to 150Hz 9.8m/s2 -
Under continuous vibration
5 to 8.4Hz - 1.75mm -
8.4 to 150Hz 4.9m/s2 -
Shock resistance Compliant with JIS B3502, IEC 61131-2 (147 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y and Z directions)
Operating atmosphere No greasy fumes, corrosive gas, flammable gas, excessive conductive dust, and direct sunlight(Same as storage atmosphere)
Operating altitude*2 2000 m (6562 ft) max.
Installation location Inside control panel
Overvoltage category*3 II or less
Pollution degree*4 2 or less
Cooling method Self-cooling
Grounding Grounding with a resistance of 100 or less
3.1 General Specifications 3 - 1
3.2 Performance Specifications The performance specifications of the GT16 is as follows.
3.2.1 GT1695M-X
3.2.2 GT1685M-S 3.2.3 GT1675M-S, GT1675M-V, GT1675-VN, GT1672-VN 3.2.4 GT1665M-S, GT1665M-V, GT1662-VN 3.2.5 GT1655-V
3.2.1 GT1695M-X
(Continued to next page)
Item Specifications
GT1695M-XTBA GT1695M-XTBD
Display section*1
Type TFT color liquid crystal display (High intensity and wide angle view)
Screen size 15"
Resolution 1,024 768 dots
Display size 304.1(12.0)(W) 228.1(8.98)(H) [mm](inch)
Display character 16-dot standard font: 64 characters 48 lines (2byte character)
12-dot standard font: 85 characters 64 lines (2byte character)
Display color 65536 colors
Display angle*13 Left/Right: 80 degrees, Top: 60 degrees, Bottom: 80 degrees*11
Intensity of LCD only 450 [cd/m]
Intensity adjustment 8-level adjustment
Life Approx. 52,000 h (Operating ambient temperature : 25C)
Backlight LED (irreplaceable)*11 backlight shutoff detection function is included Backlight off/screen saving time can be set.
Life*2 Approx. 60,000 h or longer *11
(Time when display luminance reaches 50% at the operating ambient temperature of 25C)
Touch panel*7
Type Analog resistive film
Key size Minimum 2 2 dots (per key)
Number of objects that can be simultaneously touched
Simultaneous touch prohibited *12 (If two or more points are pressed simultaneously, the switch may function near the center of the pressed points.)
Life*9 1 million times or more (operating force 0.98N max.)
Human sensor
Detection length 1(39.37) [m](inch)
Detection range Left/Right/Top/Bottom: 70 degrees
Detection delay time 0 to 4s
Detection temperature Temperature difference between human body and ambient air: 4C or higher
3 - 2 3.2 Performance Specifications
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
Item Specifications
GT1695M-XTBA GT1695M-XTBD
Memory*3
C drive Built-in flash memory 15Mbytes (for storing project data and OS)
Life (Number of write times)
100,000 times
Built-in clock precision 3.47 to 8.38sec/day (Operating ambiant temperature of 25C)*8
Battery GT15-BAT lithium battery
Backup target Clock data, maintenance time notification data, system status log, SRAM user area (500KB)
Life Approx. 5 years (Operating ambiant temperature of 25C)
Built-in interface
RS-232*5
RS-232, 1ch Transmission speed: 115,200/57,600/38,400/19,200/9,600/4,800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (Male) Application: For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (Project data read/ write, OS installation, FA transparent function)
RS-422/485*5
RS-422/485, 1ch Transmission speed: 115,200/57,600/38,400/19,200/9,600/4,800 bps Connector shape: 14-pin (female) Application: For communicating with a controller.
Ethernet
Data transfer method: 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T*6, 1ch Connector shape: RJ-45 (modular jack) Application: For communicating with a controller, using the gateway function, or connecting a personal computer (Project data read/write, OS installation, FA transparent function, MES interface function)
USB
USB (Full Speed 12Mbps), Host, 1ch Connector shape: TYPE-A, Application: For connecting a USB mouse/keyboard, USB memory data transfer, data storage When formatting a USB memory to FAT16: Up to 2GB
When formatting a USB memory to FAT32: Up to 32GB*10
USB (Full Speed 12Mbps), Device, 1ch Connector shape: Mini-B, Application: For connecting a personal computer (Project data read/write, OS installation, FA transparent function)
CF card
Compact flash slot, 1ch Connector shape: TYPE I, Application: Data transfer, data storage, GOT startup When formatting a CF card memory to FAT16: Up to 2GB
When formatting a CF card memory to FAT32: Up to 32GB*10
Option function board For option function board mounting, 1ch
Extension unit*5 For communication unit/option unit mounting, 2ch
Buzzer output Single tone (tone length adjustable)
Protective structure Outside the enclosure: IP67*4
Inside the enclosure: IP2X
External dimensions 397(15.63)(W) 296(11.65)(H) 61(2.40)(D)[mm](inch)
Panel cutting dimensions 383.5(15.10)(W) 282.5(11.12)(H)[mm](inch)
Weight (mounting fixtures are not included) 5.0kg(11.0lb)
Compatible software package GT Designer3 Version1.01B or later GT Designer2 Version2.90U or later
3.2 Performance Specifications 3 - 3
*1 Bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (unlit) may appear on a liquid crystal display panel due to its characteristics. It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom, as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of display elements. Please note that these dots appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect.
*2 The GOT screen saving/backlight off function prevents images from becoming permanently etched on the display screen and increases the backlight life.
*3 ROM in which new data can be written without deleting the written data. *4 Compliant with IP67 when the USB environmental protection cover is attached with the part of the cover firmly pushed into.
(Compliant with IP2X at the USB interface when a USB cable or USB memory is connected.) Note that this does not guarantee all users' operation environment. In addition, the GOT may not be available for use in the environment where oil or chemicals are splashed over for a long period or where oil mist is filled.
*5 For using multiple extension units, a barcode reader or an RFID controller, the total current for the extension units, barcode reader or RFID controller must be within the current that the GOT can supply. For the current for the extension units, bar code reader or RFID controller, and the current that the GOT can supply, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used
GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (2.8 Multi-channel Function)
*6 The function version A is not compatible with 10BASE-T. For how to check the function version, refer to the following.
Appendix2 Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards
*7 To use a stylus pen, the following specifications must be met. Material: polyacetal resin Tip radius: 0.8mm or more
*8 If the operating ambient temperature is other than 25C, the error may become large. *9 When using a stylus pen, it will be 100,000 times or more (operating force 0.98N max.)
Since the touch panel is a consumable product structurally, it may not be used even fewer than above, depending on the using method and usage environment.
*10 A USB memory and a CF card that store more than 2GB are available for the GT16 with the following versions of OSs installed. BootOS version: 05.09.00AF or later Standard monitor OS version: 05.09.00 or later
With OSs earlier than the above versions, the GOT cannot correctly recognize the USB memory and the CF card that store more than 2GB. If the above versions of OSs are not installed, install the OSs on the GOT by using GT Designer3 with version 1.17T or later. GT Designer2 version is not compatible with a USB memory and a CF card that store more than 2GB.
*11 For function version G or earlier, refer to the following. Display angle of the display section: Left/Right 75 degrees, Top 50 degrees, Bottom 60 degrees Backlight: Cold cathode fluorescent tube (replaceable) Backlight life: Approx. 50,000 h or more
*12 An analog resistive touch display is used. When 2 points on the screen are touched simultaneously, if a switch is located the middle of the 2 points then the switch will be activated. Therefore, avoid touching 2 points on the screensimultaneously.
*13 LCD panels have characteristics of tone reversal. Note that even within the indicated view angles, the screen display may not be clear enough depending on the display color.
3 - 4 3.2 Performance Specifications
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
3.2.2 GT1685M-S
(Continued to next page)
Item Specifications
GT1685M-STBA GT1685M-STBD
Display
section*1
Type TFT color liquid crystal display (High intensity and wide angle view)
Screen size 12.1"
Resolution 800 600 dots
Display size 246(9.69)(W) 184.5(7.26)(H) [mm](inch)
Display character 16-dot standard font: 50 characters 37 lines (2byte character) 12-dot standard font: 66 characters 50 lines (2byte character)
Display color 65536 colors
Display angle*13 Left/Right: 80 degrees, Top: 80 degrees, Bottom: 60 degrees *11
Intensity of LCD only 470 [cd/m2]
Intensity adjustment 8-level adjustment
Life Approx. 52,000 h (Operating ambient temperature: 25C)
Backlight LED (irreplaceable) *11 backlight shutoff detection function is included. Backlight off/screen saving time can be set.
Life*2 Approx. 60,000 h or longer*11
(Time when display luminance reaches 50% at the operating ambient temperature of 25C)
Touch
panel*7
Type Analog resistive film
Key size Minimum 2 2 dots (per key)
Number of objects that can be simultaneously touched
Simultaneous touch prohibited *12 If two or more points are pressed simultaneously, the switch may function near the center of the pressed points.)
Life*9 1 million times or more (operating force 0.98N max.)
Human Sensor
Detection length 1(39.37) [m](inch)
Detection range Left/Right/Top/Bottom: 70 degrees
Detection delay time 0 to 4s
Detection temperature Temperature difference between human body and ambient air: 4C or higher
Memory*3
C drive Built-in flash memory 15Mbytes (for storing project data and OS)
Life (Number of write times)
100,000 times
Built-in clock precision 3.47 to 8.38sec/day (Operating ambient temperature of 25C)*8
Battery GT15-BAT lithium battery
Backup target Clock data, maintenance time notification data, system status log, SRAM user area (500KB)
Life Approx. 5 years (Operating ambient temperature of 25C)
3.2 Performance Specifications 3 - 5
Item Specifications
GT1685M-STBA GT1685M-STBD
Built-in interface
RS-232*5
RS-232, 1ch Transmission speed: 115,200/57,600/38,400/19,200/9,600/4,800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (Male) Application: For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (Project data read/ write, OS installation, FA transparent function)
RS-422/485*5
RS-422/485, 1ch Transmission speed: 115,200/57,600/38,400/19,200/9,600/4,800 bps Connector shape: 14-pin (female) Application: For communicating with a controller.
Ethernet
Data transfer method: 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T*6, 1ch Connector shape: RJ-45 (modular jack) Application: For communicating with a controller, using the gateway function, or connecting a personal computer (Project data read/write, OS installation, FA transparent function, MES interface function)
USB
USB (Full Speed 12Mbps), Host, 1ch Connector shape: TYPE-A, Application: For connecting a USB mouse/keyboard, USB memory data transfer, data storage When formatting a USB memory to FAT16: Up to 2GB
When formatting a USB memory to FAT32: Up to 32GB*10
USB (Full Speed 12Mbps), Device, 1ch Connector shape: Mini-B, Application: For connecting a personal computer (Project data read/write, OS installation, FA transparent function)
CF card
Compact flash slot, 1ch Connector shape: TYPE I, Application: Data transfer, data storage, GOT startup When formatting a CF card to FAT16: Up to 2GB When formatting a CF card to FAT32: Up to 32GB*10
Option function board For option function board mounting, 1ch
Extension unit*5 For communication unit/option unit mounting, 2ch
Buzzer output Single tone (tone length adjustable)
Protective structure Outside the enclosure: IP67 *4 Inside the enclosure: IP2X
External dimensions 316(12.44)(W) 242(9.53)(H) 52(2.05)(D) [mm](inch)
Panel cutting dimensions 302(11.89)(W) 228(8.98)(H)[mm](inch)
Weight (mounting fixtures are not included) 2.7 kg(5.9lb)
Compatible software package GT Designer3 Version1.01B or later GT Designer2 Version2.90U or later
3 - 6 3.2 Performance Specifications
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
*1 Bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (unlit) may appear on a liquid crystal display panel due to its characteristics. It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom, as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of display elements. Please note that these dots appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect.
*2 The GOT screen saving/backlight off function prevents images from becoming permanently etched on the display screen and increases the backlight life.
*3 ROM in which new data can be written without deleting the written data. *4 Compliant with IP67 when the USB environmental protection cover is attached with the part of the cover firmly pushed into.
(Compliant with IP2X at the USB interface when a USB cable or USB memory is connected.) Note that this does not guarantee all users' operation environment. In addition, the GOT may not be available for use in the environment where oil or chemicals are splashed over for a long period or where oil mist is filled.
*5 For using multiple extension units, a barcode reader or an RFID controller, the total current for the extension units, barcode reader or RFID controller must be within the current that the GOT can supply. For the current for the extension units, bar code reader or RFID controller, and the current that the GOT can supply, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used
GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (2.8 Multi-channel Function)
*6 The function version A is not compatible with 10BASE-T. For how to check the function version, refer to the following.
Appendix2 Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards
*7 To use a stylus pen, the following specifications must be met. Material: polyacetal resin Tip radius: 0.8mm or more
*8 If the operating ambient temperature is other than 25C, the error may become large. *9 When using a stylus pen, it will be 100,000 times or more (operating force 0.98N max.)
Since the touch panel is a consumable product structurally, it may not be used even fewer than above, depending on the using method and usage environment.
*10 A USB memory and a CF card that store more than 2GB are available for the GT16 with the following versions of OSs installed. BootOS version: 05.09.00AF or later Standard monitor OS version: 05.09.00 or later
With OSs earlier than the above versions, the GOT cannot correctly recognize the USB memory and the CF card that store more than 2GB. If the above versions of OSs are not installed, install the OSs on the GOT by using GT Designer3 with version 1.17T or later. GT Designer2 version is not compatible with a USB memory and a CF card that store more than 2GB.
*11 For function version G or earlier, refer to the following. Display angle of the display section: Left/Right 80 degrees, Top 60 degrees, Bottom 80 degrees Backlight: Cold cathode fluorescent tube (replaceable) Backlight life: Approx. 50,000 h or more
*12 An analog resistive touch display is used. When 2 points on the screen are touched simultaneously, if a switch is located the middle of the 2 points then the switch will be activated. Therefore, avoid touching 2 points on the screensimultaneously.
*13 LCD panels have characteristics of tone reversal. Note that even within the indicated view angles, the screen display may not be clear enough depending on the display color.
3.2 Performance Specifications 3 - 7
3.2.3 GT1675M-S, GT1675M-V, GT1675-VN, GT1672-VN
(Continued to next page)
Item
Specifications
GT1675M-STBA GT1675M-STBD
GT1675M-VTBA GT1675M-VTBD
GT1675-VNBA GT1675-VNBD
GT1672-VNBA GT1672-VNBD
Display
section*1
Type TFT color liquid crystal display (High intensity and wide angle view)
TFT color liquid crystal display
Screen size 10.4"
Resolution 800 600 dots 640 480 dots
Display size 211(8.31)(W) 158(6.22)(H) [mm](inch)
Display character
16-dot standard font: 50 characters 37 lines (2byte character) 12-dot standard font: 66 characters 50 lines (2byte character)
16-dot standard font: 40 characters 30 lines (2byte character) 12-dot standard font: 53 characters 40 lines (2byte character)
Display color 65536 colors 4096 colors 16 colors
Display angle*16 Left/Right: 80 degrees, Top: 80 degrees, Bottom:
60 degrees *13
Left/Right: 80 degrees, Top: 80 degrees,
Bottom:60 degrees *10
Left/Right: 80 degrees, Top: 80 degrees, Bottom: 60 degrees *14
Intensity of LCD only 400 [cd/m2] 500 [cd/m2]*11 200 [cd/m2]
Intensity adjustment 8-level adjustment 4-level adjustment
Life Approx. 52,000 h (Operating ambient temperature:
25C) *13 Approx. 52,000 h (Operating ambient temperature: 25C)
Backlight LED (irreplaceable) *13 backlight shutoff detection function is included. Backlight off/screen saving time can be set.
Life*2 Approx. 60,000 h or longer *13
(Time when display luminance reaches 50% at the operating ambient temperature of 25C)
Touch
panel*6
Type Analog resistive film
Key size Minimum 2 2 dots (per key)
Number of objects that can be simultaneously touched
Simultaneous touch prohibited *15 (If two or more points are pressed simultaneously, the switch may function near the center of the pressed points.)
Life*8 1 million times or more (operating force 0.98N max.)
Human Sensor
Detection length None
Detection range None
Detection delay time None
Detection temperature None
Memory*3
C drive Built-in flash memory 15Mbytes (for storing project data and OS)
Built-in flash memory 11Mbytes (for storing project data and OS)
Life (Number of write times)
100,000 times
Built-in clock precision 3.47 to 8.38sec/day (Operating ambient temperature of 25C)*7
Battery GT15-BAT lithium battery
Backup target Clock data, maintenance time notification data, system status log, SRAM user area (500KB)
Life Approx. 5 years (Operating ambient temperature of 25C)
3 - 8 3.2 Performance Specifications
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
Item
Specifications
GT1675M-STBA GT1675M-STBD
GT1675M-VTBA GT1675M-VTBD
GT1675-VNBA GT1675-VNBD
GT1672-VNBA GT1672-VNBD
Built-in interface
RS-232*5
RS-232, 1ch Transmission speed: 115,200/57,600/38,400/19,200/9,600/4,800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (Male) Application: For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (Project data read/ write, OS installation, FA transparent function)
RS-422/485*5
RS-422/485, 1ch Transmission speed: 115,200/57,600/38,400/19,200/9,600/4,800 bps Connector shape: 14-pin (female) Application: For communicating with a controller.
Ethernet
Data transfer method: 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T, 1ch Connector shape: RJ-45 (modular jack) Application: For communicating with a controller, using the gateway function, or connecting a personal computer (Project data read/write, OS installation, FA transparent function, MES interface function)
USB
USB (Full Speed 12Mbps), Host, 1ch Connector shape: TYPE-A, Application: For connecting a USB mouse/keyboard, USB memory data transfer, data storage When formatting a USB memory to FAT16: Up to 2GB When formatting a USB memory to FAT32: Up to 32GB*9
USB (Full Speed 12Mbps), Device, 1ch Connector shape: Mini-B, Application: For connecting a personal computer (Project data read/write, OS installation, FA transparent function)
CF card
Compact flash slot, 1ch Connector shape: TYPE I, Application: Data transfer, data storage, GOT startup When formatting a CF card to FAT16: Up to 2GB
When formatting a CF card to FAT32: Up to 32GB*9
Option function board For option function board mounting, 1ch
Extension unit*5 For communication unit/option unit mounting, 2ch
Buzzer output Single tone (tone length adjustable)
Protective structure Outside the enclosure: IP67 *4 Inside the enclosure: IP2X
External dimensions 303(11.93)(W) 214(8.43)(H) 49(1.93)(D) [mm](inch)
Panel cutting dimensions 289(11.38)(W) 200(7.87)(H)[mm](inch)
Weight (mounting fixtures are not included) 2.1kg(4.6lb) 2.3kg(5.1lb)*12 2.3kg(5.1lb)
Compatible software package GT Designer3 Version1.01B or later GT Designer2 Version2.96A or later
GT Designer3 Version1.17T or later
3.2 Performance Specifications 3 - 9
*1 Bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (unlit) may appear on a liquid crystal display panel due to its characteristics. It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom, as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of display elements. Please note that these dots appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect.
*2 The GOT screen saving/backlight off function prevents images from becoming permanently etched on the display screen and increases the backlight life.
*3 ROM in which new data can be written without deleting the written data. *4 Compliant with IP67 when the USB environmental protection cover is attached with the part of the cover firmly pushed into.
(Compliant with IP2X at the USB interface when a USB cable or USB memory is connected.) Note that this does not guarantee all users' operation environment. In addition, the GOT may not be available for use in the environment where oil or chemicals are splashed over for a long period or where oil mist is filled.
*5 For using multiple extension units, a barcode reader or an RFID controller, the total current for the extension units, barcode reader or RFID controller must be within the current that the GOT can supply. For the current for the extension units, bar code reader or RFID controller, and the current that the GOT can supply, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used
GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (2.8 Multi-channel Function)
*6 To use a stylus pen, the following specifications must be met. Material: polyacetal resin Tip radius: 0.8mm or more
*7 If the operating ambient temperature is other than 25C, the error may become large. *8 When using a stylus pen, it will be 100,000 times or more (operating force 0.98N max.)
Since the touch panel is a consumable product structurally, it may not be used even fewer than above, depending on the using method and usage environment.
*9 A USB memory and a CF card that store more than 2GB are available for the GT16 with the following versions of OSs installed. BootOS version: 05.09.00AF or later Standard monitor OS version: 05.09.00 or later
With OSs earlier than the above versions, the GOT cannot correctly recognize the USB memory and the CF card that store more than 2GB. If the above versions of OSs are not installed, install the OSs on the GOT by using GT Designer3 with version 1.17T or later. GT Designer2 version is not compatible with a USB memory and a CF card that store more than 2GB.
*10 Top/Bottom/Left/Right: 88 degrees for function version C or earlier
*11 450 [cd/m2] for function version C or earlier *12 2.1kg for function version C or earlier *13 For function version G or earlier, refer to the following.
Display angle of the display section: Left/Right/Top/Bottom 88 degrees Display section life: Approx. 43,000 h (operating ambient temperature 25C) Backlight: Cold cathode fluorescent tube (replaceable) Backlight life: Approx. 50,000 h or more
*14 For function version G or earlier, refer to the following. Left/Right: 45 degrees, Top: 30 degrees, Bottom: 20 degrees
*15 An analog resistive touch display is used. When 2 points on the screen are touched simultaneously, if a switch is located the middle of the 2 points then the switch will be activated. Therefore, avoid touching 2 points on the screensimultaneously.
*16 LCD panels have characteristics of tone reversal. Note that even within the indicated view angles, the screen display may not be clear enough depending on the display color.
3 - 10 3.2 Performance Specifications
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
3.2.4 GT1665M-S, GT1665M-V, GT1662-VN
(Continued to next page)
Item
Specifications
GT1665M-STBA GT1665M-STBD
GT1665M-VTBA GT1665M-VTBD
GT1662-VNBA GT1662-VNBD
Display
section*1
Type TFT color liquid crystal display (High intensity and wide angle view) TFT color liquid crystal display
Screen size 8.4"
Resolution 800 600 dots 640 480 dots
Display size 171(6.73)(W) 128(5.04)(H) [mm](inch)
Display character
16-dot standard font: 50 characters 37 lines (2byte character) 12-dot standard font: 66 characters 50 lines (2byte character)
16-dot standard font: 40 characters 30 lines (2byte character) 12-dot standard font: 53 characters 40 lines (2byte character)
Display color 65536 colors 16 colors
Display angle*13 Left/Right/Top/Bottom: 80 degrees *10 Left/Right/Top/Bottom: 80 degrees
*11
Intensity of LCD only 400 [cd/m2] 500 [cd/m2] *10 200 [cd/m2]
Intensity adjustment 8-level adjustment 4-level adjustment
Life Approx. 43,000 h (Operating ambient temperature: 25C)
Backlight LED (irreplaceable) *10 backlight shutoff detection function is included. Backlight off/screen saving time can be set.
Life*2 Approx. 60,000 h or longer *10
(Time when display luminance reaches 50% at the operating ambient temperature of 25C)
Approx. 60,000 h or longer
*11(Time when display luminance reaches 50% at the operating ambient temperature of 25C)
Touch
panel*6
Type Analog resistive film
Key size Minimum 2 2 dots (per key)
Number of objects that can be simultaneously touched
Simultaneous touch prohibited*12 (If two or more points are pressed simultaneously, the switch may function near the center of the pressed points.)
Life*8 1 million times or more (operating force 0.98N max.)
Human Sensor
Detection length None
Detection range None
Detection delay time None
Detection temperature None
Memory*3
C drive Built-in flash memory 15Mbytes (for storing project data and OS) Built-in flash memory 11Mbytes (for storing project data and OS)
Life (Number of write times)
100,000 times
Built-in clock precision 3.47 to 8.38sec/day (Operating ambient temperature of 25C)*7
Battery GT15-BAT lithium battery
Backup target Clock data, maintenance time notification data, system status log, SRAM user area (500KB)
Life Approx. 5 years (Operating ambient temperature of 25C)
3.2 Performance Specifications 3 - 11
Item
Specifications
GT1665M-STBA GT1665M-STBD
GT1665M-VTBA GT1665M-VTBD
GT1662-VNBA GT1662-VNBD
Built-in interface
RS-232*5
RS-232, 1ch Transmission speed: 115,200/57,600/38,400/19,200/9,600/4,800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (Male) Application: For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (Project data read/ write, OS installation, FA transparent function)
RS-422/485*5
RS-422/485, 1ch Transmission speed: 115,200/57,600/38,400/19,200/9,600/4,800 bps Connector shape: 14-pin (female) Application: For communicating with a controller.
Ethernet
Data transfer method: 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T, 1ch Connector shape: RJ-45 (modular jack) Application: For communicating with a controller, using the gateway function, or connecting a personal computer (Project data read/write, OS installation, FA transparent function, MES interface function)
USB
USB (Full Speed 12Mbps), Host, 1ch Connector shape: TYPE-A, Application: For connecting a USB mouse/keyboard, USB memory data transfer, data storage When formatting a USB memory to FAT16: Up to 2GB
When formatting a USB memory to FAT32: Up to 32GB*9
USB (Full Speed 12Mbps), Device, 1ch Connector shape: Mini-B, Application: For connecting a personal computer (Project data read/write, OS installation, FA transparent function)
CF card
Compact flash slot, 1ch Connector shape: TYPE I, Application: Data transfer, data storage, GOT startup When formatting a CF card to FAT16: Up to 2GB
When formatting a CF card to FAT32: Up to 32GB*9
Option function board For option function board mounting, 1ch
Extension unit*5 For communication unit/option unit mounting, 2ch
Buzzer output Single tone (tone length adjustable)
Protective structure Outside the enclosure: IP67 *4 Inside the enclosure: IP2X
External dimensions 241(9.49)(W) 190(7.48)(H) 52(2.05)(D) [mm](inch)
Panel cutting dimensions 227(8.94)(W) 176(6.93)(H)[mm](inch)
Weight (mounting fixtures are not included) 1.7kg(3.7lb) 1.8kg(3.9lb)
Compatible software package GT Designer3 Version1.01B or later GT Designer2 Version2.96A or later
GT Designer3 Version1.17T or later
3 - 12 3.2 Performance Specifications
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
*1 Bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (unlit) may appear on a liquid crystal display panel due to its characteristics. It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom, as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of display elements. Please note that these dots appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect.
*2 The GOT screen saving/backlight off function prevents images from becoming permanently etched on the display screen and increases the backlight life.
*3 ROM in which new data can be written without deleting the written data. *4 Compliant with IP67 when the USB environmental protection cover is attached with the part of the cover firmly pushed into.
(Compliant with IP2X at the USB interface when a USB cable or USB memory is connected.) Note that this does not guarantee all users' operation environment. In addition, the GOT may not be available for use in the environment where oil or chemicals are splashed over for a long period or where oil mist is filled.
*5 For using multiple extension units, a barcode reader or an RFID controller, the total current for the extension units, barcode reader or RFID controller must be within the current that the GOT can supply. For the current for the extension units, bar code reader or RFID controller, and the current that the GOT can supply, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used
GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (2.8 Multi-channel Function)
*6 To use a stylus pen, the following specifications must be met. Material: polyacetal resin Tip radius: 0.8mm or more
*7 If the operating ambient temperature is other than 25C, the error may become large. *8 When using a stylus pen, it will be 100,000 times or more (operating force 0.98N max.)
Since the touch panel is a consumable product structurally, it may not be used even fewer than above, depending on the using method and usage environment.
*9 A USB memory and a CF card that store more than 2GB are available for the GT16 with the following versions of OSs installed. BootOS version: 05.09.00AF or later Standard monitor OS version: 05.09.00 or later
With OSs earlier than the above versions, the GOT cannot correctly recognize the USB memory and the CF card that store more than 2GB. If the above versions of OSs are not installed, install the OSs on the GOT by using GT Designer3 with version 1.17T or later. GT Designer2 version is not compatible with a USB memory and a CF card that store more than 2GB.
*10 For function version G or earlier, refer to the following. Display angle of the display section: Left/Right 80 degrees, Top 80 degrees, Bottom 60 degrees
LCD intensity of the display section: 600 [cd/m2] Backlight: Cold cathode fluorescent tube (replaceable) Backlight life: Approx. 50,000 h or more
*11 For function version G or earlier, refer to the following. Display angle of the display section: Left/Right 45 degrees, Top 20 degrees, Bottom 20 degrees Backlight life: Approx. 40,000 h or more
*12 An analog resistive touch display is used. When 2 points on the screen are touched simultaneously, if a switch is located the middle of the 2 points then the switch will be activated. Therefore, avoid touching 2 points on the screensimultaneously.
*13 LCD panels have characteristics of tone reversal. Note that even within the indicated view angles, the screen display may not be clear enough depending on the display color.
3.2 Performance Specifications 3 - 13
3.2.5 GT1655-V
(Continued to next page)
Item Specifications
GT1655-VTBD
Display
section*1
Type TFT color liquid crystal display (High intensity and wide angle view)
Screen size 5.7"
Resolution 640 480 dots
Display size 115(4.53)(W) 86(3.39)(H) [mm](inch)
Display character 16-dot standard font: 40 characters 30 lines (2byte character) 12-dot standard font: 53 characters 40 lines (2byte character)
Display color 65536 colors
Display angle*11 Top/Bottom/Left/Right: 80 degrees
Intensity of LCD only 350 [cd/m2]
Intensity adjustment 8-level adjustment
Life Approx. 50,000 h (Operating ambient temperature: 25C)
Backlight LED (irreplaceable) backlight shutoff detection function is included. Backlight off/screen saving time can be set.
Life*2 Approx. 70,000 h or longer (Time when display luminance reaches 50% at the operating ambient temperature of 25C)
Touch panel*6
Type Analog resistive film
Key size Minimum 2 2 dots (per key)
Number of objects that can be simultaneously touched
Simultaneous touch prohibited*10 (If two or more points are pressed simultaneously, the switch may function near the center of the pressed points.)
Life*8 1 million times or more (operating force 0.98N max.)
Human Sensor
Detection length None
Detection range None
Detection delay time None
Detection temperature None
Memory*3
C drive Built-in flash memory 15Mbytes (for storing project data and OS)
Life (Number of write times)
100,000 times
Built-in clock precision -3.61 to 2.16sec/day (Operating ambient temperature of 25C)*7
Battery GT11-50BAT lithium battery
Backup target Clock data, maintenance time notification data, system status log, SRAM user area (500KB)
Life Approx. 5 years (Operating ambient temperature of 25C)
3 - 14 3.2 Performance Specifications
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
Item Specifications
GT1655-VTBD
Built-in interface
RS-232*5
RS-232, 1ch Transmission speed: 115,200/57,600/38,400/19,200/9,600/4,800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (Male) Application: For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (Project data read/ write, OS installation, FA transparent function)
RS-422/485*5
RS-422/485, 1ch Transmission speed: 115,200/57,600/38,400/19,200/9,600/4,800 bps Connector shape: 14-pin (female) Application: For communicating with a controller.
Ethernet
Data transfer method: 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T, 1ch Connector shape: RJ-45 (modular jack) Application: For communicating with a controller, using the gateway function, or connecting a personal computer (Project data read/write, OS installation, FA transparent function, MES interface function)
USB
USB (Full Speed 12Mbps), Host, 1ch Connector shape: TYPE-A, Application: For connecting a USB mouse/keyboard, USB memory data transfer, data storage When formatting a USB memory to FAT16: Up to 2GB When formatting a USB memory to FAT32: Up to 32GB*9
USB (Full Speed 12Mbps), Device, 1ch Connector shape: Mini-B, Application: For connecting a personal computer (Project data read/write, OS installation, FA transparent function)
CF card
Compact flash slot, 1ch Connector shape: TYPE I, Application: Data transfer, data storage, GOT startup When formatting a CF card to FAT16: Up to 2GB
When formatting a CF card to FAT32: Up to 32GB*9
Option function board For option function board mounting, 1ch
Extension unit*5 For communication unit/option unit mounting, 1ch
Buzzer output Single tone (tone length adjustable)
Protective structure Outside the enclosure: IP67 *4 Inside the enclosure: IP2X
External dimensions 167(6.57)(W) 135(5.31)(H) 60(2.36)(D) [mm](inch)
Panel cutting dimensions 153(5.31)(W) 121(4.76)(H)[mm](inch)
Weight (mounting fixtures are not included) 1.0kg(2.2lb)
Compatible software package GT Designer3 Version1.28E or later
3.2 Performance Specifications 3 - 15
*1 Bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (unlit) may appear on a liquid crystal display panel due to its characteristics. It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom, as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of display elements. Please note that these dots appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect.
*2 The GOT screen saving/backlight off function prevents images from becoming permanently etched on the display screen and increases the backlight life.
*3 ROM in which new data can be written without deleting the written data. *4 Compliant with IP67 when the USB environmental protection cover is attached with the part of the cover firmly pushed into.
(Compliant with IP2X at the USB interface when a USB cable or USB memory is connected.) Note that this does not guarantee all users' operation environment. In addition, the GOT may not be available for use in the environment where oil or chemicals are splashed over for a long period or where oil mist is filled.
*5 For using multiple extension units, a barcode reader or an RFID controller, the total current for the extension units, barcode reader or RFID controller must be within the current that the GOT can supply. For the current for the extension units, bar code reader or RFID controller, and the current that the GOT can supply, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used
*6 To use a stylus pen, the following specifications must be met. Material: polyacetal resin Tip radius: 0.8mm or more
*7 If the operating ambient temperature is other than 25C, the error may become large. *8 When using a stylus pen, it will be 100,000 times or more (operating force 0.98N max.)
Since the touch panel is a consumable product structurally, it may not be used even fewer than above, depending on the using method and usage environment.
*9 A USB memory and a CF card that store more than 2GB are available for the GT16 with the following versions of OSs installed. BootOS version: 05.09.00AF or later Standard monitor OS version: 05.09.00 or later
With OSs earlier than the above versions, the GOT cannot correctly recognize the USB memory and the CF card that store more than 2GB. If the above versions of OSs are not installed, install the OSs on the GOT by using GT Designer3 with version 1.17T or later. GT Designer2 version is not compatible with a USB memory and a CF card that store more than 2GB.
*10 An analog resistive touch display is used. When 2 points on the screen are touched simultaneously, if a switch is located the middle of the 2 points then the switch will be activated. Therefore, avoid touching 2 points on the screensimultaneously.
*11 LCD panels have characteristics of tone reversal. Note that even within the indicated view angles, the screen display may not be clear enough depending on the display color.
3 - 16 3.2 Performance Specifications
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
3.3 Power Supply Specifications The following describes the power supply specifications for the GT16.
3.3.1 For GOTs powered from the 100 to 240VAC power supply
3.3.2 For GOTs powered from the 24VDC power supply
HINT
Operation at momentary failure If an instantaneous power failure occurs in the power supply and continues for more than the permissible
period, the GOT will be reset. Make sure to power on the unit more than 5 seconds after power-off.
3.3.1 For GOTs powered from the 100 to 240VAC power supply
Item
Specifications
GT1695M-XTBA GT1685M-STBA
GT1675M-STBA GT1675M-VTBA GT1675-VNBA GT1672-VNBA
GT1665M-STBA GT1665M-VTBA GT1662-VNBA
Input power supply voltage 100 to 240VAC (+10% -15%)
Input frequency 50/60Hz 5%
Input max. apparent power 150VA (maximum load) 110VA (maximum load) 100VA (maximum load)
Power consumption 64W or less 46W or less 39W or less
At backlight off 38W or less 32W or less 30W or less
Inrush current 28A or less (4ms) (maximum load)
Allowable momentary power failure time
20ms or less (100VAC or more)
Noise immunity 1,500Vp-p noise voltage, 1 s noise width (when measuring with a noise simulator under 25 to 60Hz noise frequency)
Dielectric withstand voltage 1500VAC for 1 minute across power terminals and earth
Insulation resistance 10M or more across power terminals and earth by a 500V DC insulation resistance tester
Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2 [mm2]
Applicable solderless terminal
Solderless terminal for M3 screw RAV1.25-3, V2-S3.3, V2-N3A, FV2-N3A
Applicable tightening torque (Terminal block terminal screw)
0.5 to 0.8 [Nm]
3.3 Power Supply Specifications 3 - 17
3.3.2 For GOTs powered from the 24VDC power supply
Item
Specifications
GT1695M-XTBD GT1685M-STBD
GT1675M-STBD GT1675M-VTBD GT1675-VNBD GT1672-VNBD
GT1665M-STBD GT1665M-VTBD GT1662-VNBD
GT1655-VTBD
Input power supply voltage 24VDC (+25%, -20%)
Power consumption 60W or less 40W or less 38W or less 16W or less
At backlight off 30W or less 26W or less 27W or less 14W or less
Inrush current 12A or less (75ms) (maximum load)
12A or less (55ms) (maximum load) 67A or less (1ms) (maximum load)
Allowable momentary power failure time
10 ms or less
Noise immunity 500Vp-p noise voltage, 1 s noise width (when measuring with a noise simulator under 25 to 60Hz noise frequency)
Dielectric withstand voltage 500VDC for 1 minute across power terminals and earth
Insulation resistance 10M or more across power terminals and earth by a 500V DC insulation resistance tester
Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2 [mm2]
Applicable solderless terminal
Solderess terminal for M3 screw RAV1.25-3, V2-S3.3, V2-N3A, FV2-N3A
Applicable tightening torque (Terminal block terminal screw)
0.5 to 0.8 [Nm]
3 - 18 3.3 Power Supply Specifications
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
3.4 Battery Specifications
Applicable battery The following batteries are applicable for GT16.
Battery specifications The following describes the battery specifications for the GT16.
HINT For the battery directive in EU member states, refer to 9.4Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built-in Batteries in EU Member States.
Battery life Life span of the battery set in the GOT is shown below.
* In the following conditions, the data backup time is 5 minutes after the power supply is turned off. The battery connector is disconnected. The battery lead is disconnected.
POINT
Battery life and replacement time (1) Battery life reference: Approx.4 years in actual use (Ambient temperature: 25C)
Battery replacement time reference: 3 to 4 years Calculate the natural discharge amount of the battery, as necessary.
(2) Check if the battery condition is normal within the utility. Refer to the following for the details of battery status display.
(Basic Utility) 2.1.1 Time setting
Model name Description Target GOT
GT15-BAT Battery for backup of clock data, maintenance time notification data, and
system status log
GT1695, GT1685, GT1675, GT1672, GT1665, GT1662
GT11-50BAT GT1655
Item Specifications
Model name GT15-BAT GT11-50BAT
Type Magnesium manganese dioxide lithium primary battery
Initial voltage 3.0V
Nominal current 1800mAh 550mAh
Storage life Approx.5 years (Operating ambient temperature of 25C)
Total power stoppage time Battery life
Lithium content 0.00057kg 0.00015kg
Application For backup of clock data, maintenance timing setting data and system status log.
Battery life
Operating ambient temperature of 25 to 45C
Operating ambient temperature Other than 25 to 45C
Data backup time after detection of battery voltage low*
4 years 3 years 14 days
3.4 Battery Specifications 3 - 19
4. PART NAME AND SETTINGS
4.1 Part Names and Settings of the GT1695
21)
19)
1)
4)
5)
6)
10) 11) 20)18)
22)
12)
13)
14)
17) 16) 15)
7) 8) 9)
2), 3)
4 - 1 4.1 Part Names and Settings of the GT1695
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
A M
E A
N D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
HINT
Connector used for the RS-232 interface The specification of the connector used for the RS-232 interface of GT1695 is as follows.
Connector used for the RS-422/485 interface The specification of the connector used for the RS-422/485 interface of GT1695 is as follows.
No. Name Description
1) POWER LED
Lit in green : Power is correctly supplied Lit in orange : Screen saving Blinks in orange/green: Blown back light bulb Not lit : Power is not supplied
2) Display screen Displays the Utility and the user creation screen.
3) Touch key For operating the touch switches in the Utility and the user creation screen
4) USB interface (Device) For connecting a personal computer (Connector type: Mini-B)
5) USB interface (Host) For connecting a USB mouse/keyboard, data transfer and storage (Connector type: TYPE-A)
6) RS-232 interface For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (Connector type: D sub 9-pin)
7) Ethernet interface For communicating with a controller or using the gateway function (Connector type: RJ-45 (modular jack))
8) RS-422/485 interface For communicating with a controller (Connector type: 14-pin (female))
9) Power terminal Power input terminal, LG terminal, FG terminal
10) Extension interface1 For installing an extension unit (I/F-1)
11) Extension interface2 For installing an extension unit (I/F-2)
12) CF card interface For installing a CF card
13) CF card access LED Lit : CF card accessed Not lit: CF card not accessed
14) CF card access switch Used for accepting or stopping the access to the CF card before removing the CF card from the GOT ON : CF card being accessed (CF card removal prohibited) OFF: CF card not accessed (CF card removal possible)
15) Video/RGB interface For mounting the video input unit, RGB input unit, video/RGB input unit, RGB output unit, or multimedia unit
16) Terminating resistor setting dip switch (inside the cover)
For switching on and off of the terminating resistor for the RS-422/485 communication port
17) Optional function board interface For installing the optional function board
18) Reset switch Hardware reset switch (Inoperative in the bus connection or with the bus connection unit installed)
19) Hole for unit installation fitting Hole for inserting the unit installation fitting
20) Battery cover Houses the battery.
21) Human sensor Sensor that detects human movement
22) Installation switch Used for OS installations at the GOT startup
Manufacturer : DDK Ltd. Model name : 17LE-23090-27 (D4CK) or equivalent product
Manufacturer : Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd. Model name : HDR-EC14LFDT1-SLE+ or equivalent product
4.1 Part Names and Settings of the GT1695 4 - 2
4.2 Part Names and Settings of the GT1685
21)
2), 3)
1)
4)
5)
6)
10)
17) 16)15)
11)
22)
12)
18)
13)
14)
20)
7) 8) 9)
19)
4 - 3 4.2 Part Names and Settings of the GT1685
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
A M
E A
N D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
HINT
Connector used for the RS-232 interface The specification of the connector used for the RS-232 interface of GT1685 is as follows.
Connector used for the RS-422/485 interface The specification of the connector used for the RS-422/485 interface of GT1685 is as follows.
No. Name Description
1) POWER LED
Lit in green : Power is correctly supplied Lit in orange : Screen saving Blinks in orange/green: Blown back light bulb Not lit : Power is not supplied
2) Display screen Displays the Utility and the user creation screen.
3) Touch key For operating the touch switches in the Utility and the user creation screen
4) USB interface (Device) For connecting a personal computer (Connector type: Mini-B)
5) USB interface (Host) For connecting a USB mouse/keyboard, data transfer and storage (Connector type: TYPE-A)
6) RS-232 interface For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (Connector type: D sub 9-pin)
7) Ethernet interface For communicating with a controller or using the gateway function (Connector type: RJ-45 (modular jack))
8) RS-422/485 interface For communicating with a controller (Connector type: 14-pin (female))
9) Power terminal Power input terminal, LG terminal, FG terminal
10) Extension interface1 For installing an extension unit (I/F-1)
11) Extension interface2 For installing an extension unit (I/F-2)
12) CF card interface For installing a CF card
13) CF card access LED Lit : CF card accessed Not lit: CF card not accessed
14) CF card access switch Used for stopping the access to the CF card before removing the CF card from the GOT ON : CF card being accessed (CF card removal prohibited) OFF: CF card not accessed (CF card removal possible)
15) Video/RGB interface For mounting the video input unit, RGB input unit, video/RGB input unit, RGB output unit, or multimedia unit
16) Terminating resistor setting switch (inside the cover)
For switching on and off of the terminating resistor for the RS-422/485 communication port
17) Optional function board interface For installing the optional function board
18) Reset switch Hardware reset switch (Inoperative in the bus connection or with the bus connection unit installed)
19) Hole for unit installation fitting Hole for inserting the unit installation fitting
20) Battery cover Houses the battery
21) Human sensor Sensor that detects human movement
22) Installation switch Used for OS installations at the GOT startup
Manufacturer : DDK Ltd. Model name : 17LE-23090-27 (D4CK) or equivalent product
Manufacturer : Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd. Model name : HDR-EC14LFDT1-SLE+ or equivalent product
4.2 Part Names and Settings of the GT1685 4 - 4
4.3 Part Names and Settings of the GT1675, GT1672
1)
4)
5)
2), 3)
19)
6) 7) 8) 9)
12)
13) 14)
10) 11) 20) 18)
17) 16) 15)
21)
4 - 5 4.3 Part Names and Settings of the GT1675, GT1672
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
A M
E A
N D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
*1 There is no interface in GT1675-VN and GT1672-VN.
HINT
Connector used for the RS-232 interface The specification of the connector used for the RS-232 interface of GT1675 and GT1672 is as follows.
Connector used for the RS-422/485 interface The specification of the connector used for the RS-422/485 interface of GT1675 and GT1672 is as follows.
No. Name Description
1) POWER LED
Lit in green : Power is correctly supplied Lit in orange : Screen saving Blinks in orange/green: Blown back light bulb Not lit : Power is not supplied
2) Display screen Displays the Utility and the user creation screen.
3) Touch key For operating the touch switches in the Utility and the user creation screen
4) USB interface (Device) For connecting a personal computer (Connector type: Mini-B)
5) USB interface (Host) For connecting a USB mouse/keyboard, data transfer and storage (Connector type: TYPE-A)
6) RS-232 interface For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (Connector type: D sub 9-pin)
7) Ethernet interface For communicating with a controller or using the gateway function (Connector type: RJ-45 (modular jack))
8) RS-422/485 interface For communicating with a controller (Connector type: 14-pin (female))
9) Power terminal Power input terminal, LG terminal, FG terminal
10) Extension interface1 For installing an extension unit (I/F-1)
11) Extension interface2 For installing an extension unit (I/F-2)
12) CF card interface For installing a CF card
13) CF card access LED Lit : CF card accessed Not lit: CF card not accessed
14) CF card access switch Used for accepting or stopping the access to the CF card before removing the CF card from the GOT ON : CF card being accessed (CF card removal prohibited) OFF: CF card not accessed (CF card removal possible)
15) Video/RGB interface *1 For mounting the video input unit, RGB input unit, video/RGB input unit, RGB output unit, or multimedia unit
16) Terminating resistor setting dip switch (inside the cover)
For switching on and off of the terminating resistor for the RS-422/485 communication port
17) Optional function board interface For installing the optional function board
18) Reset switch Hardware reset switch (Inoperative in the bus connection or with the bus connection unit installed)
19) Hole for unit installation fitting Hole for inserting the unit installation fitting
20) Battery cover Houses the battery
21) Installation switch Used for OS installations at the GOT startup
Manufacturer : DDK Ltd. Model name : 17LE-23090-27 (D4CK) or equivalent product
Manufacturer : Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd. Model name : HDR-EC14LFDT1-SLE+ or equivalent product
4.3 Part Names and Settings of the GT1675, GT1672 4 - 6
4.4 Part Names and Settings of the GT1665, GT1662
12)
21)
13) 14)
1)
4)
5)
2), 3)
8) 6) 7) 9)
10) 11) 18)
17) 16) 15)
20)
19)
4 - 7 4.4 Part Names and Settings of the GT1665, GT1662
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
A M
E A
N D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
*1 There is no interface in GT1662-VN.
HINT
Connector used for the RS-232 interface The specification of the connector used for the RS-232 interface of GT1665 and GT1662 is as follows.
Connector used for the RS-422/485 interface The specification of the connector used for the RS-422/485 interface of GT1665 and GT1662 is as follows.
No. Name Description
1) POWER LED
Lit in green : Power is correctly supplied Lit in orange : Screen saving Blinks in orange/green: Blown back light bulb Not lit : Power is not supplied
2) Display screen Displays the Utility and the user creation screen.
3) Touch key For operating the touch switches in the Utility and the user creation screen
4) USB interface (Device) For connecting a personal computer (Connector type: Mini-B)
5) USB interface (Host) For connecting a USB mouse/keyboard, data transfer and storage (Connector type: TYPE-A)
6) RS-232 interface For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (Connector type: D sub 9-pin)
7) Ethernet interface For communicating with a controller or using the gateway function (Connector type: RJ-45 (modular jack))
8) RS-422/485 interface For communicating with a controller (Connector type: 14-pin (female))
9) Power terminal Power input terminal, LG terminal, FG terminal
10) Extension interface1 For installing an extension unit (I/F-1)
11) Extension interface2 For installing an extension unit (I/F-2)
12) CF card interface For installing a CF card
13) CF card access LED Lit : CF card accessed Not lit: CF card not accessed
14) CF card access switch Used for stopping the access to the CF card before removing the CF card from the GOT ON : CF card being accessed (CF card removal prohibited) OFF: CF card not accessed (CF card removal possible)
15) Video/RGB interface *1 For mounting the video input unit, RGB input unit, video/RGB input unit, RGB output unit, or multimedia unit
16) Terminating resistor setting switch (inside the cover)
For switching on and off of the terminating resistor for the RS-422/485 communication port
17) Optional function board interface For installing the optional function board
18) Reset switch Hardware reset switch (Inoperative in the bus connection or with the bus connection unit installed)
19) Hole for unit installation fitting Hole for inserting the unit installation fitting
20) Battery holder Houses the battery
21) Installation switch Used for OS installations at the GOT startup
Manufacturer : DDK Ltd. Model name : 17LE-23090-27 (D4CK) or equivalent product
Manufacturer : Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd. Model name : HDR-EC14LFDT1-SLE+ or equivalent product
4.4 Part Names and Settings of the GT1665, GT1662 4 - 8
4.5 Part Names and Settings of the GT1655
1)
2), 3)
4)
5)
17)
9)8)6)7)
20) 14) 15)
16)
19) 12) 13)
11) 18)
10)
4 - 9 4.5 Part Names and Settings of the GT1655
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
A M
E A
N D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
HINT
Connector used for the RS-232 interface The specification of the connector used for the RS-232 interface of GT1655 is as follows.
Connector used for the RS-422/485 interface The specification of the connector used for the RS-422/485 interface of GT1655 is as follows.
No. Name Description
1) POWER LED
Lit in green : Power is correctly supplied Lit in orange : Screen saving Blinks in orange/green: Blown back light bulb Not lit : Power is not supplied
2) Display screen Displays the Utility and the user creation screen.
3) Touch key For operating the touch switches in the Utility and the user creation screen
4) USB interface (Device) For connecting a personal computer (Connector type: Mini-B)
5) USB interface (Host) For connecting a USB mouse/keyboard, data transfer and storage (Connector type: TYPE-A)
6) RS-232 interface For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (Connector type: D sub 9-pin)
7) Ethernet interface For communicating with a controller or using the gateway function (Connector type: RJ-45 (modular jack))
8) RS-422/485 interface For communicating with a controller (Connector type: 14-pin (female))
9) Power terminal Power input terminal, FG terminal
10) Extension interface1 For installing an extension unit (I/F-1)
11) CF card interface For installing a CF card
12) CF card access LED Lit : CF card accessed Not lit: CF card not accessed
13) CF card access switch Used for stopping the access to the CF card before removing the CF card from the GOT ON : CF card being accessed (CF card removal prohibited) OFF: CF card not accessed (CF card removal possible)
14) Terminating resistor setting switch (inside the cover)
For switching on and off of the terminating resistor for the RS-422/485 communication port
15) Optional function board interface For installing the optional function board
16) Reset switch Hardware reset switch (Inoperative in the bus connection or with the bus connection unit installed)
17) Hole for unit installation fitting Hole for inserting the unit installation fitting
18) Battery cover Houses the battery
19) Installation switch Used for OS installations at the GOT startup
20) Functional ground terminal For grounding
Manufacturer : DDK Ltd. Model name : 17LE-23090-27 (D4CK) or equivalent product
Manufacturer : Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd. Model name : HDR-EC14LFDT1-SLE+ or equivalent product
4.5 Part Names and Settings of the GT1655 4 - 10
4 - 11 4.5 Part Names and Settings of the GT1655
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT A
G E
D IR
EC TI
VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
5. EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE
For the products sold in European countries, the conformance to the EMC Directive, which is one of the European Directives, has been a legal obligation since 1996. Also, conformance to the Low Voltage. Directive, another European Directives, has been a legal obligation since 1997. Manufacturers who recognize their products must conform to the EMC and Low Voltage Directive are required to declare that their products conform to these Directives and put a "CE mark" on their products.
Authorized representative in Europe Authorized representative in Europe is shown below. Name :Mitsubishi Electric Europe BV Address :Mitsubishi-Electric-Platz 1, 40882 Ratingen, Germany
5.1 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive EMC Directives are those which require "any strong electromagnetic force is not output to the external.:Emission (electromagnetic interference)" and "It is not influenced by the electromagnetic wave from the external.: Immunity (electromagnetic sensitivity)". Items 5.1.1 thru 5.1.3 summarize the precautions to use GOT and configure the mechanical unit in order to match the EMC directives. Though the data described herein are produced with our best on the basis of the requirement items and standards of the restrictions gathered by Mitsubishi Electric, they do not completely guaranteed that all mechanical unit manufactured according to the data do not always match the above directives. The manufacturer itself which manufactures the mechanical unit must finally judge the method and others to match the EMC directives.
5.1 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive 5 - 1
5.1.1 EMC directive
The standards of the EMC Directive are shown below.
*1 The GOT is an open type device (device installed to another device) and must be installed in a conductive control panel. The above test items are conducted in the condition where the GOT is installed on the conductive control panel and combined with the Mitsubishi Electric PLC.
*2 QP: Quasi-peak value, Mean : Average value *3 The above test items are conducted in the following conditions.
30M-230MHz QP : 40dB V/m (10m in measurement range) 230M-1000MHz QP : 47dB V/m (10m in measurement range)
Applied standard Test standard Test details Standard value
EN61131-2 : 2007
EN55011
Radiated noise*1 Electromagnetic emissions from the product are measured.
30M-230MHz QP:
30dB V/m (30m in measurement range)*2, *3
230M-1000MHz QP:
37dB V/m(30m in measurement range)*2, *3
EN55011
Conducted noise*1 Electromagnetic emissions from the product to the power line is measured.
150k-500kHz QP:79dB,
Mean: 66dB*2
500k-30MHz QP:73dB,
Mean: 60dB*2
EN61000-4-2
Electrostatic immunity*1 Immunity test in which static electricity is applied to the cabinet of the equipment.
4kV Contact discharge 8kV Aerial discharge
EN61000-4-3 Radiated field AM
modulation*1
Immunity test in which field is irradiated to the product.
80-1000MHz:10V/m 1.4-2GHz:3V/m 2.0-2.7GHz:1V/m 80%AM modulation@1kHz
EN61000-4-4
Fast transient burst noise*1
Immunity test in which burst noise is applied to the power line and signal lines.
Power cable: 2kV Digital I/O: 1kV Analog I/O: 1kV Signal cable: 1kV
EN61000-4-5
Surge immunity*1 Immunity test in which lightening surge is applied to the product.
AC power type Power line (between line and ground): 2kV Power line (between lines): 1kV Data communication port: 1kV DC power type Power line (between line and ground): 0.5kV Power line (between lines): 0.5kV Data communication port: 1kV
EN61000-4-6
Conducted RF immunity*1 Immunity test in which a noise inducted on the power and signal lines is applied.
Power line: 10V Data communication port: 10V
EN61000-4-8 Power supply frequency magnetic field immunity
Test for checking normal operations under the circumstance exposed to the ferromagnetic field noise of the power supply frequency (50/60Hz).
30 A/m
EN61000-4-11 EN61000-4-29 Instantaneous power failure and voltage dips immunity
Test for checking normal operations at instantaneous power failure.
AC power type 0.5 cycle 0% (interval 1 to 10s) 250/300 cycle 0% 10/12 cycle 40% 25/30 cycle 70% DC power type 10ms (interval 1 to 10s)
5 - 2 5.1 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT A
G E
D IR
EC TI
VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
5.1.2 Control panel
The GOT is an open type device (device installed to another device) and must be installed in a conductive control panel. It not only assure the safety but also has a large effect to shut down the noise generated from GOT, on the control panel.
(1) Control panel (a) The control panel must be conductive. (b) When fixing a top or bottom plate of the control panel with bolts, do not coat the plate and bolt surfaces so
that they will come into contact. And connect the door and box using a thick grounding cable in order to ensure the low impedance under high frequency.
(c) When using an inner plate to ensure electric conductivity with the control panel, do not coat the fixing bolt area of the inner plate and control panel to ensure conductivity in the largest area as possible.
(d) Ground the control panel using a thick grounding cable in order to ensure the low impedance under high frequency.
(e) The diameter of cable holes in the control panel must be 10cm (3.94in.). In order to reduce the chance of radio waves leaking out, ensure that the space between the control panel and its door is small as possible. Paste the following EMI gasket directly on the painted surface to seal the space so that the leak of electric wave can be suppressed.
Our test has been carried out on a panel having the damping characteristics of 37dB max. and 30dB mean (measured by 3m method with 30 to 300MHz).
(2) Connection of power and ground wires Ground and power supply wires for the GOT must be connected as described below. (a) Provide a grounding point near the GOT. Short-circuit the LG and FG terminals of the GOT (LG: line
ground, FG: frame ground) and ground them with the thickest and shortest wire possible (The wire length must be 30cm (11.81in.) or shorter.) The LG and FG terminals function is to pass the noise generated in the GOT system to the ground, so an impedance that is as low as possible must be ensured. As the wires are used to relieve the noise, the wire itself carries a large noise content and thus short wiring means that the wire is prevented from acting as an antenna. Note) A long conductor will become a more efficient antenna at high frequency.
(b) The earth wire led from the earthing point must be twisted with the power supply wires. By twisting with the earthing wire, noise flowing from the power supply wires can be relieved to the earthing. However, if a filter is installed on the power supply wires, the wires and the earthing wire may not need to be twisted.
Manufacturer Series model name
KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES CO., LTD. UC series (Recommended Product)
5.1 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive 5 - 3
5.1.3 Noise filter (power supply line filter)
The noise filter (power supply line filter) is a device effective to reduce conducted noise. Except some models, installation of a noise filter onto the power supply lines is not necessary. However conducted noise can be reduced if it is installed. (The noise filter is generally effective for reducing conducted noise in the band of 10MHz or less.) Usage of the following filters is recommended.
The precautions required when installing a noise filter are described below.
(1) Do not install the input and output cables of the noise filter together to prevent the output side noise will be inducted into the input side cable where noise has been eliminated by the noise filer.
(2) Connect the noise filter's ground terminal to the control panel with the shortest cable as possible (approx. 10cm (3.94 in.) or less).
Model name FN343-3/01 FN660-6/06 ZHC2203-11
Manufacturer SCHAFFNER SCHAFFNER TDK
Rated current 3A 6A 3A
Rated voltage 250V
Installing the input and output cables together will cause noise induction.
Separate the input cable from the output cable.
Filter
Induction
Output side
(device side)
Input side
(power supply side)
Filter
Output side
(device side)
Input side
(power supply side)
5 - 4 5.1 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT A
G E
D IR
EC TI
VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
5.2 Requirements for Conpliance with the Low Voltage Directive
The Low Voltage Directive requires each device which operates with power supply ranging from 50VAC to 1000V and 75VDC to 1500V to satisfy necessary safety items. In the Sections from 5.2.1 to 5.2.5, cautions on installation and wiring of the GOT to conform to the Low Voltage Directive requires are described. We have put the maximum effort to develop this material based on the requirements and standards of the Directive that we have collected. However, compatibility of the devices which are fabricated according to the contents of this manual to the above Directive is not guaranteed. Each manufacturer who fabricates such device should make the final judgement about the application method of the Low Voltage Directive and the product compatibility.
5.2.1 Standard subject to GOT
5.2.2 Power supply
The insulation specification of the GOT was designed assuming installation category II. Be sure to use the installation category II power supply to the GOT. The installation category indicates the durability level against surge voltage generated by lightning strike. Category I has the lowest durability; category IV has the highest durability.
Installation Category
Category II indicates a power supply whose voltage has been reduced by two or more levels of isolating transformers from the public power distribution.
Standard applied to GOT : EEN61131-2 Programmable controllers - Equipment requirements and tests EN60950-1 Safety of Information Technology Equipment
Category ICategory IICategory IIICategory IV
5.2 Requirements for Conpliance with the Low Voltage Directive 5 - 5
5.2.3 Control panel
Because the GOT is open type equipment (device designed to be stored within another device), be sure to use it only when installed in a control panel.
(1) Shock protection In order to prevent those who are unfamiliar with power facility, e.g., an operator, from getting a shock, make sure to take the following measures on the control panel. (a) Store the GOT within the control panel locked, and allow only those who are familiar with power facility to
unlock the panel. (b) Build the structure in order that the power supply will be shut off when the control panel is opened.
(2) Dustproof and waterproof features The control panel also provides protection from dust, water and other substances. Insufficient ingression protection may lower the insulation withstand voltage, resulting in insulation destruction. The insulation in the GOT is designed to cope with the pollution level 2, so use in an environment with pollustion level 2 or better.
5.2.4 Grounding
The following are applicable ground terminals. Use them in the grounded state. Be sure to ground the GOT for ensuring the safety and complying with the EMC Directive.
5.2.5 External wiring
(1) External devices When a device with a hazardous voltage circuit is externally connected to the GOT, select a model which complies with the Low Voltage Directive's requirements for isolation between the primary and secondary circuits.
(2) Insulation requirements Dielectric withstand voltages are shown in the following table.
Reinforced Insulation Withstand Voltage (Installation Category II, source : IEC664)
Pollution level1 : An environment where the air is dry and conductive dust does not exist. Pollution level2 : An environment where conductive dust does not usually exist, but occasional
temporary conductivity occurs due to the accumulated dust. Generally, this is the level for inside the control panel equivalent a control room or on the floor of a typical factory.
Pollution level3 : An environment where conductive dust exits and conductivity may be generated due to the accumulated dust. An environment for a typical factory floor.
Pollution level4 : Continuous conductivity may occur due to rain, snow, etc. An outdoor environment.
Functional grounding : Improves the noise resistance.
Rated voltage of hazardous voltage area Surge withstand voltage (1.2/50 s)
150 VAC or below 2500V
300 VAC or below 4000V
5 - 6 5.2 Requirements for Conpliance with the Low Voltage Directive
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT A
G E
D IR
EC TI
VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
5.3 EMC Directive-Compliant System Configuration For the GOT1000 series models compliant with the EMC Directive, contact your local distributor.
5.3.1 GOT
Use any of the following GOTs with which CE mark logo is printed on the rating plate. For how to confirm the hardware version of a GOT, refer to the following.
Appendix2 Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards
When using a GOT other than shown below, the system does not conform to the EMC Directive.
*1 To comply with the EMC Directive, use the hardware version of a GOT shown above or laterwhen the GT16M-V4, GT16M-R2, GT16M-V4R1, GT16M-ROUT, or GT16M-MMR is mounted on the GOT. When the hardware version of a GOT is earlier than the version shown above, the GOT does not comply with the EMC Directive.
Item Model Hardware version of the GOT (Production year and month)
GT1695
GT1695M-XTBA Version J or later (Feb., 2009)
Version R or later (Oct., 2009)*1
GT1695M-XTBD Version H or later (Feb., 2009)
Version Q or later (Oct., 2009)*1
GT1685 GT1685M-STBA Version G or later (Feb., 2009)
GT1685M-STBD Version F or later (Feb., 2009)
GT1675
GT1675M-STBA Version F or later (Oct., 2009)
GT1675M-STBD Version E or later (Oct., 2009)
GT1675M-VTBA Version F or later (Oct., 2009)
GT1675M-VTBD Version E or later (Oct., 2009)
GT1675-VNBA Version A or later (Apr., 2010)
GT1675-VNBD Version A or later (Apr., 2010)
GT1672 GT1672-VNBA Version A or later (Apr., 2010)
GT1672-VNBD Version A or later (Apr., 2010)
GT1665
GT1665M-STBA Version G or later (Oct., 2009)
GT1665M-STBD Version E or later (Oct., 2009)
GT1665M-VTBA Version J or later (Oct., 2009)
GT1665M-VTBD Version H or later (Oct., 2009)
GT1662 GT1662-VNBA Version A or later (Apr., 2010)
GT1662-VNBD Version A or later (Apr., 2010)
GT1655 GT1655-VTBD Version A or later (Jan., 2011)
5.3 EMC Directive-Compliant System Configuration 5 - 7
5.3.2 Connection method
Use the following methods to connect with the GOT to ensure compliance with the EMC Directive. : Compliant with EMC Directive : Not compliant with EMC Directive
*1 For details about each connection method, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2/GT Works2
*2 When connecting the GOT to other controllers as a PLC manufactured by other company, create the cable (by the user) and configure the system to meet the EMC Directive specifications for the connected device.
( (9) PLC (manufactured by other company), microcomputer, temperature controller, inverter, servo amplifier, CNC,
MODBUS(R)/RTU or MODBUS(R)/TCP connection)
POINT
Connected devices If connecting to the PLC or microcomputer other than Mitsubishi Electric products (MELSEC-Q series, MELSEC-L series, MELSEC-QnA series or MELSEC-A series) please refer to the EMC Directive compliance manual for that specific device.
Connection method*1 GT16
Bus connection
Direct connection to CPU
Computer link connection
MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network)
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection
CC-Link IE Field Network connection
CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
CC-Link connection (via G4)
Ethernet connection
GOT multi-drop connection
Other connections *2
5 - 8 5.3 EMC Directive-Compliant System Configuration
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT A
G E
D IR
EC TI
VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
5.3.3 When the communication unit is used
Use the following communication unit with the GOT to ensure compliance with the EMC Directive. The GOT does not comply with the EMC Directive when connected with other than followings.
(Continued to next page)
Connection method Communication unit used Hardware version of the communication unit
(Production year and month)
Bus connection
GT15-QBUS Version D or later (Oct., 2005)
GT15-QBUS2 GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2
Version C or later (Oct., 2005)
GT15-75QBUSL GT15-75QBUS2L GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L
Version G or later (Mar., 2005)
Direct connection to CPU
GOT RS-232 interface -
GOT RS-422/485 interface -
GT15-RS2T4-9P Version A or later
GT15-RS2-9P GT15-RS4-9S
Version D or later (Jan., 2006)
Computer link connection
GOT RS-232 interface -
GOT RS-422/485 interface -
GT15-RS2T4-9P Version A or later
GT15-RS2-9P GT15-RS4-9S
Version D or later (Jan., 2006)
MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network)
GT15-J71LP23-25 GT15-J71BR13
Version C or later (Sep., 2006)
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection
GT15-J71GP23-SX Version A or later (Dec., 2007)
CC-Link IE Field Network connection
GT15-J71GF13-T2 Version A or later (Apr., 2011)
CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station)
GT15-J61BT13 Version C or later (Sep., 2006)
Ethernet connection GOT Ethernet interface -
Microcomputer connection (Serial)
GOT RS-232 interface -
GOT RS-422/485 interface -
GT15-RS2T4-9P Version A or later
GT15-RS2-9P GT15-RS4-9S
Version D or later (Jan., 2006)
Microcomputer connection (Ethernet)
GOT Ethernet interface -
5.3 EMC Directive-Compliant System Configuration 5 - 9
Connection method Communication unit used Hardware version of the communication unit
(Production year and month)
Third party PLC connection
GOT S-232 interface -
GOT RS-422/485 interface -
GT15-RS2T4-9P Version A or later
GT15-RS2-9P GT15-RS4-9S
Version D or later (Jan., 2006)
Temperature controller connection
GOT RS-232 interface -
GT15-RS2T4-9P Version A or later
GT15-RS2-9P GT15-RS4-9S GT15-RS4-TE
Version D or later (Jan., 2006)
Inverter connection
GT15-RS2T4-9P Version A or later
GT15-RS4-9S Version D or later (Jan., 2006)
Servo amplifier connection
GOT RS-232 interface -
GT15-RS2T4-9P Version A or later
GT15-RS2-9P GT15-RS4-9S
Version D or later (Jan., 2006)
CNC connection
GOT RS-232 interface -
GT15-RS2T4-9P Version A or later
GT15-RS2-9P GT15-RS4-9S
Version D or later (Jan., 2006)
GT15-J71LP23-25 GT15-J71BR13 GT15-J61BT13
Version C or later (Sep., 2006)
GOT Ethernet interface -
MODBUS /RTU connection
GOT RS-232 interface -
GOT RS-422/485 interface -
GT15-RS2T4-9P Version A or later
GT15-RS2-9P GT15-RS4-9S
Version D or later (Jan., 2006)
MODBUS /TCP connection GOT Ethernet interface -
5 - 10 5.3 EMC Directive-Compliant System Configuration
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT A
G E
D IR
EC TI
VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
5.3.4 When the option unit is used
To meet the EMC Directive, use the following option units. When an option unit other than below is used, it does not meet the EMC Directive.
*1 For the printer to be connected, configure the system in accordance with the EMC Directive specifications for the printer as requested by the printer manufacturer.
*2 To comply with the EMC Directive, use the hardware version of an option unit shown above or later when the option unit is mounted on the GT1695, GT1675, or GT1665. When the hardware version of an option unit is earlier than the version shown above, the GOT does not comply with the EMC Directive.
5.3.5 When the option is used
To meet the EMC Directive, use the following option. When an option other than below is used, it does not meet the EMC Directive.
Product name Model name Hardware version of option unit
(Production year and month)
Video input unit GT16M-V4 Version B or later (Jan., 2009)
Version E or later (Oct., 2009)*2
RGB input unit GT16M-R2 Version B or later (Jan., 2009)
Version E or later (Oct., 2009)*2
Video/RGB input unit GT16M-V4R1 Version B or later (Jan., 2009)
Version E or later (Oct., 2009)*2
RGB output unit GT16M-ROUT Version B or later (Jan., 2009)
Multimedia unit GT16M-MMR Version B or later (Jan., 2009)
Version E or later (Oct., 2009)*2
Printer unit*1 GT15-PRN Version B or later (Feb.,2006)
CF card unit GT15-CFCD Version C or later (Jul.,2007)
CF card extension unit GT15-CFEX-C08SET Version B or later (Jul.,2007)
External I/O unit GT15-DIO Version B or later (May,2007)
GT15-DIOR Version A or later (Jul.,2008)
Sound output unit GT15-SOUT Version B or later (May,2007)
Product name Model name Hardware version of option
(Production year and month)
Option function board GT16-MESB Version B or later (Jan., 2009)
5.3 EMC Directive-Compliant System Configuration 5 - 11
5.3.6 Cables
(1) Cables used (a) For the MELSECNET/H connection (coaxial cable) and video connection, use double shield coaxial cables.
The 5C-2V connector plug is applicable to double-shielded coaxial cable. Connect the 5C-2V connector plug to the coaxial cable inside a double-shielded coaxial cable. Ground the shielded part outside a double-shielded coaxial cable as shown in the following figure.
(b) For the CC-Link IE Field Network connection, use the following cable dedicated to the CC-Link IE Field Network.
(c) For details of the cables used for conncetions other than the above, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2/GT Works2
(2) Adjusting a cable for the EMC Directive compliance Modify the cables (including user-produced cable) to ensure compliance with the EMC Directive. For details, refer to Section 5.4.2.
Manufacturer Model name
Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd. SC-E5EW-S M
Grounding
Mitsubishi Cable ... 5C-2V-CCY
Double-shielded coaxial cable
Internal conducter
Insulation material
External conductor
Sheath
External conductor (Grounding)
SheathEnlarged view of cable
5 - 12 5.3 EMC Directive-Compliant System Configuration
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT A
G E
D IR
EC TI
VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
5.4 Precautions for Wiring/Connecting the EMC Directive-Compliant Product
Wire and connect GOT1000 series equipments as instructed below. If the GOT1000 series equipments are configured in a way different from the following instructions, the system may not comply with EMC directives.
5.4.1 Power and ground wires wiring method
(1) Power and ground wires wiring method Connect the power wire and connection cable as shown in the illustration, and be sure to attach a ferrite core (TDK Corporation type ZCAT3035-1330) within the range shown below. Lead the power wire and ground wire as shown in 5.1.2 (2). Make sure to ground the LG cable, FG cable, and functional ground cable. (a) 100-240VAC GOT power section
(b) 24VDC GOT power section For other than GT1655
GOT power supply section
GOT power supply section
INPUT 100-240VAC
(LG) (FG)
90 m
m o
r l es
s
Ferrite core (ZCAT3035-1330)
INPUT 24VDC
+ -
90 m
m o
r l es
s Ferrite core (ZCAT3035-1330)
(LG) (FG)
5.4 Precautions for Wiring/Connecting the EMC Directive-Compliant Product 5 - 13
For GT1655
* Be sure to ground the functional ground terminal and power FG terminal.
Ferrite core (ZCAT3035-1330)
INPUT 24VDC
+-(FG)
90 m
m o
r l es
s
Functional grounding
5 - 14 5.4 Precautions for Wiring/Connecting the EMC Directive-Compliant Product
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT A
G E
D IR
EC TI
VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
5.4.2 Processing connection cables
Process the cable used with the GOT with the following method. When processing the cable, ferrite core, cable clamp and shielding material are required. The cable clamp used by Mitsubishi Electric for the EMC specification compatibility test is shown below. TDK corporation brand ZCAT3035-1330 Ferrite Core Mitsubishi Electric Model AD75CK cable clamp Japan Zipper Tubing Co., Ltd. Zipper tube SHNJ type
(1) BUS connection cable (a) For GT15-QC B, GT15-QC BS
Peel the sheath (with the length shown below) at both ends of the cable, and expose the shield braided
wire for grounding. (For grounding with cable clamps. (refer to Section 5.4.3.))
(b) For GT15-C BS Cut the connection wire protruding from both ends of the cable to the lengths shown below. Attach the ferrite core to the cable in the position as illustrated below and insert the ground wire into the
ferrite core. Peel the sheath (with the length shown below) at both ends of the cable, and expose the shield braided
wire for grounding. (For grounding with cable clamps. (refer to Section 5.4.3.))
Unit : mm (inch)
360 or less
(14.17)
360 or less
(14.17)(1.57)(1.57)
40 40
GOT side PLC/GOT side
60 or less
GOT side PLC/GOT side Ferrite Core
(ZCAT3035-1330)
360 or less
(2.36)
(14.17) (1.57)
40
60 or less
360 or less
(2.36)
(14.17)(1.57)
40
Unit : mm (inch)
Ground wires
(280mm
(11.02 inch))
5.4 Precautions for Wiring/Connecting the EMC Directive-Compliant Product 5 - 15
(c) For other bus connection cables Wind cable shield material around the cable, and pull out the grounding braided wire of the cable shield
material with the length shown below. Attach the ferrite core to the cable in the position as illustrated below and insert the braided wire for
grounding into the ferrite core.
(2) CPU direct connection and computer link connection Attach the ferrite core to the cable in the position as illustrated below.
(3) For MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) (a) For coaxial cable
Strip the outer insulation layer at both ends of the cable by the length shown below to expose the outer braided shield for grounding. (For grounding with cable clamps (refer to Section 5.4.3.))
Attach ferrite cores to the cable in the positions as illustrated below.
(b) For optical fiber cable Processing of the cable is not required.
80
Grounding braided wire
(200mm (7.87 inch))
Grounding braided wire
(50mm (1.97 inch))
Cable shield material
40 or less
GOT side PLC side Ferrite Core
(ZCAT3035-1330)
(1.57)
40 or less
(1.57)
(3.15)
80
(3.15)
Unit : mm (inch)
100 or less
Unit : mm (inch)
GOT side PLC sideFerrite Core
(ZCAT3035-1330)
(3.94)
100 or less
(3.94)
(ZCAT3035-1330)
GOT side
130 or
less
130 or
less
230 or less
Ferrite Core
(5.12) (5.12)
(9.06) Unit : mm (inch)(1.57)
40
(1.57)
40 400 or less
(15.75)
PLC side
5 - 16 5.4 Precautions for Wiring/Connecting the EMC Directive-Compliant Product
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT A
G E
D IR
EC TI
VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
(4) CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station) Strip the outer insulation layer at both ends of the cable by the length shown below to expose the braided
shield for grounding. (For grounding with cable clamps (refer to Section 5.4.3.)) Attach ferrite cores to the cable in the positions as illustrated below.
(5) CC-Link IE Feild Network connection Strip the outer insulation layer at both ends of the cable by the length shown below to expose the braided
shield for grounding. (For grounding with cable clamps (refer to Section 5.4.3.)) Attach ferrite cores to the cable in the positions as illustrated below
CC-Link dedicated cable for connecting the GOT and PLC.
CC-Link dedicated cable for connecting the GOT and GOT
GOT side
230 or less
(9.06) (1.57)
40
(ZCAT3035-1330)
Ferrite Core
(1.57)
40 400 or less
(15.75)
PLC side
130
(5.12)
130
(5.12)
Unit : mm (inch)
GOT side GOT side
230 or less
(9.06)
230 or less
(9.06)(1.57)
40
(ZCAT3035-1330)
Ferrite Core
(1.57)
40
Unit : mm (inch)
130
(5.12)
130
(5.12)
GOT side Controller side Ferrite Core
(ZCAT3035-1330)
120 or less
(4.72) 230 or less
(9.06) 400 or less
(15.75)(1.57) 40
(1.57) 40
Unit : mm (inch)
5.4 Precautions for Wiring/Connecting the EMC Directive-Compliant Product 5 - 17
(6) Ethernet connection Strip the outer insulation layer at both ends of the cable by the length shown below to expose the braided
shield for grounding. (For grounding with cable clamps. (refer to Section 5.4.3.)) Attach the ferrite core to the cable in the position as illustrated below.
(a) When connecting to the Ethernet interface
(b) When connecting to the multimedia unit (GT16M-MMR)
(7) External I/O device connection Strip the outer insulation layer at both ends of the cable by the length shown below to expose the braided
shield for grounding. (For grounding with cable clamps (Refer to Section 5.4.3.)) Connect the braided shield to the connector with the connector cover. Twist power cables.
GOT side PLC/
personal computer side Ferrite Core
(ZCAT3035-1330)
120 or
less
(4.72)
230 or less
(9.06)
400 or less
(15.75)(1.57)
40
(1.57)
40
Unit : mm (inch)
120 or
less
(4.72)
GOT side Personal computer sideFerrite Core
(ZCAT3035-1330)
120 or
less
230 or less
(9.06) (1.57)
40 Unit : mm (inch)
120 or
less
Connector cover
Braided shield
GOT side External I/O device side
360 or less 360 or less40 40
Unit : mm (inch)
Power cable
(14.17) (14.17) (1.57) (1.57)
5 - 18 5.4 Precautions for Wiring/Connecting the EMC Directive-Compliant Product
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT A
G E
D IR
EC TI
VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
(8) Video/RGB connection (a) Video input
Peel the sheath (with the length shown below) at both ends of the cable, and expose the shield braided wire for grounding. (For grounding with cable clamps. (refer to Section 5.4.3.))
Attach the ferrite core to the cable in the position as illustrated below.
(b) RGB input Wind cable shield material around the cable, and pull out the grounding braided wire of the cable shield
material with the length shown below. Attach the ferrite core to the cable in the position as illustrated below
(c) RGB output Wind cable shield material around the cable, and pull out the grounding braided wire of the cable shield
material with the length shown below. Attach the ferrite core to the cable in the position as illustrated below.
(HF90T28X13X16)
(1.57)(1.57)
130 or less
GOT side
Camcorder/
Vision sensor side Ferrite Core
Ferrite Core
(ZCAT3035-1330)
230 or less 400 or less40 40
130 or less
(5.12)(5.12)
Unit : mm (inch) (15.75)(9.06)
GOT side
Vision sensor/
personal computer
40
or less130 or less
Unit : mm (inch)
Ferrite Core
(ZCAT3035-1330)
Grounding braided wire
(50mm)
Cable shield material 40
or less 130 or less
(5.12) (1.57) (5.12)(1.57)
GOT side external display side
200 or less 20 or less 20 or less 200 or less
Unit : mm (inch)
Ferrite Core
(ZCAT3035-1330)
Grounding braided wire (50mm)
Cable shield material
(7.87)(7.87) (0.79)(0.79)
5.4 Precautions for Wiring/Connecting the EMC Directive-Compliant Product 5 - 19
(9) PLC (manufactured by other company), microcomputer, temperature controller, inverter, servo amplifier, CNC, MODBUS(R)/RTU or MODBUS(R)/TCP connection Produce the cable (RS-232 cable, RS-422 / 485 cable) for connecting the GOT to a controller with reference to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2/GT Works2
POINT
Configure the system to meet the EMC Directive specifications for the connected device when connecting the GOT to a controller. The following gives the instructions to ensure the machinery comply with the EMC Directive. However, the manufacturer of the machinery must finally determine how to make it comply with the EMC Directives: if it is actually compliant with the EMC Directives.
(a) For RS-422 / 485 cable Each signal wire (excluding SG and FG) should be made into a two power wires and connected, then
twisted.
Make the SG wire more than two wires and connect. (b) For RS-232 cable
Use a twisted pair style for each signal wire (except SG, FG) with SG.
Attach the ferrite core to the cable in the position as illustrated below.
RDA
RDB
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SDA
SDB
RD
SD
DTR
DSR
SG
SD
RD
DSR
DTR
SG
PLC sideGOT side
Unit : mm (inch)
Ferrite Core
(ZCAT3035-1330)
100 or less
(3.94)
100 or less
(3.94)
5 - 20 5.4 Precautions for Wiring/Connecting the EMC Directive-Compliant Product
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT A
G E
D IR
EC TI
VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
5.4.3 Grounding the cable
Ground the cable and grounding wire to the control panel where the GOT and base unit are installed.
Braided shield
Cable clamps
GOT FG terminal FG wire
Bus connection cable
a) For GT15-C EXSS-1 and GT15-C BS
Ground the ground wire to the FG terminal of the GOT power supply section.
2) Do not arrange the cable clamp adjacent to other cables which do not clamp.
Noise from the control panel may access the GOT from the cable clamp and
cause adverse effects.
1) Ground the braided shield portion of the cable to the control panel
with the cable clamp (AD75CK).
b) For other bus connection cables
Ground the braided wire for grounding to the control panel
by tightening a screw.
For the cable clamp attaching details,
refer to AD75CK-type Cable Clamping Instruction Manual
5.4 Precautions for Wiring/Connecting the EMC Directive-Compliant Product 5 - 21
6. INSTALLATION
6.1 Control Panel Inside Dimensions for Mounting GOT Install the GOT and the CF card extension unit on the control panel out of the way for the equipment inside the control panel. Do not install the GOT and the unit in prohibited areas for the installation.
POINT
Applicable cable Some cables may need to be longer than the specified dimensions when connecting to the GOT. Therefore, consider the connector dimensions and bending radius of the cable as well for installation.
CAUTION Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in this manual.
Do not expose the GOT to dust, lamp soot, conductive dust, corrosive gas, or combustible gas; high-temperature, condensing, wind or rain; or to vibrations and impact. Failure to do so can cause an electric shock, fire, malfunction or product damage or deterioration.
Do not drop chips or wire scraps near the ventilation window of the GOT when processing screw holes or wiring. Failure to do so can cause a fire, failure or malfunction.
Tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a drop, short-circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the unit.
Make sure to install the connection cable to the connector specified during the power OFF. Failure to do so may cause a malfunction due to the poor contact.
6 - 1 6.1 Control Panel Inside Dimensions for Mounting GOT
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
A LL
AT IO
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
6.2 Panel Cutting Dimensions (1) Panel cutting dimensions when installing GOT
Make an installation hole on the control panel with the dimensions shown below. Make space of 10mm above and below the hole respectively for the installation fittings.
(2) Panel cutting dimensions when installing CF card extension unit Make an installation hole on the control panel with the dimensions shown below. Make space of 10mm on the left and right of the hole respectively for the installation fittings.
POINT
Precautions before executing the panel cut If the GOT is installed on the panel, remove the GOT from the panel temporarily.
A
B
* Panel thickness: 2 to 4 mm or less
GOT A [mm] (inch) B [mm] (inch)
GT1695M-X 383.5(15.10) (+2(0.08), 0(0))
282.5(11.12) (+2(0.08), 0(0))
GT1685M-S 302(11.89) (+2(0.08), 0(0))
228(8.98) (+2(0.08), 0(0))
GT1675M-S GT1675M-V GT1675-VN GT1672-VN
289(11.38) (+2(0.08), 0(0))
200(7.87) (+2(0.08), 0(0))
GT1665M-S GT1665M-V GT1662-VN
227(8.94) (+2(0.08), 0(0))
176(6.93) (+2(0.08), 0(0))
GT1655-V 153(6.02) (+2(0.08), 0(0))
121(4.76) (+2(0.08), 0(0))
A
B
* Panel thickness: 2 to 4 mm or less
GOT A [mm] (inch) B [mm] (inch)
GT15-CFEX- C08SET
94(3.70) (+2(0.08), 0(0))
33(1.30) (+2(0.08), 0 (0))
6.
6.3 Mounting Position
For installing GOT When mounting the GOT, the following clearances must be left from the other device. Depending on the units and cables connected to the GOT, clearances more than the described dimensions can be required. Therefore, consider the connector dimensions and bending radius of the cable as well for installation. For the lead-in allowance for cables at the bottom of the GOT, refer to the following.
Appendix1 External Dimensions B
A
C ED
Panel thickness:
2 to 4mm
(0.08 to 0.16inch)
6 - 3 6.3 Mounting Position
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
A LL
AT IO
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
According to the dimensions in the following table, leave clearances between the GOT and the other devices. The values enclosed in square brackets apply to the case where no other equipment generating radiated noise (such as a contactor) or heat is installed near the GOT. However, keep the ambient temperature of the GOT to 55C or lower.
Unit: mm (inch)
Type GT1695M-X GT1685M-S
GT1675M-S GT1675M-V GT1675-VN GT1672-VN
GT1665N-S GT1665M-V GT1662-VN
GT1655-V
A
GOT only 50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more]
50(1.97) or more [26(1.02) or more]
50(1.97) or more [36(1.42) or more] 61(2.40) or more
Bus connection unit is fitted 50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more]
50(1.97) or more [26(1.02) or more]
50(1.97) or more [36(1.42) or more] 50(1.97) or more
Serial communication unit fitted 50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more]
50(1.97) or more [26(1.02) or more]
50(1.97) or more [36(1.42) or more] 49(1.93) or more
RS-422 Conversion unit is fitted 50(1.97) or more 51(2.01) or more 63(2.48) or more 73(2.87) or more -
CC-Link communication unit (GT15- J61BT13) fitted
50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more]
50(1.97) or more [24(0.94) or more]
MELSECNET/H communication unit (coaxial) fitted
50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more]
50(1.97) or more [24(0.94) or more]
50(1.97) or more [33(1.30) or more] 50(1.97) or more 64(2.52) or more
MELSECNET/H communication unit (optical) fitted
50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more]*1 79(3.11) or more*1
CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit fitted
50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more] 57(2.24) or more
CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit fitted
50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more] 57(2.24) or more
Video input unit fitted*4 50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more]*2
-
RGB input unit fitted*4 50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more]*3
-
Video/RGB input unit fitted*4 50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more]*2*3 -
RGB output unit fitted*4 50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more]*3
-
Multimedia unit fitted*4 50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more]*2
-
Printer unit fitted 50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more]
50(1.97) or more [26(1.02) or more]
50(1.97) or more [36(1.42) or more]
50(1.97) or more [29(1.14) or more]
CF card unit 50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more]
50(1.97) or more [26(1.02) or more]
50(1.97) or more [36(1.42) or more]
50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more]
CF card extension unit 50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more]
50(1.97) or more [26(1.02) or more]
50(1.97) or more [36(1.42) or more] 50(1.97) or more
External I/O unit 50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more]
50(1.97) or more [26(1.02) or more]
50(1.97) or more [36(1.42) or more] 50(1.97) or more
Sound output unit 50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more]
50(1.97) or more [26(1.02) or more]
50(1.97) or more [36(1.42) or more] 50(1.97) or more
B 80 (3.15) or more [20 (0.79) or more]
C
(When the CF card is not used) 50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more]
50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more]*5
(When the CF card is used) 50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more] 100(3.94) or more
D 50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more]
E 100 (39.4) or more [20 (0.79) or more]
6.3 Mounting Position 6 - 4
* 1 This value differs depending on the cable used. Please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd. The value indicated in the table is a reference value.
* 2 This value is for use of the coaxial cable 3C-2V (JIS C 3501). For specifications of the cable, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT Works3
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2/GT Works2 * 3 This value differs depending on the cable used.
If the bending radius of the cable used is greater than the value specified above, apply the value of the cable used. * 4 GT1675-V, GT1672-V, GT1662-V, GT1655-V cannot be used. * 5 Dimension when no battery is used
If a battery is used, the dimension when a CF card is used is required.
For installing CF card extension unit (1) Installing location
(a) Depth dimensions When the control panel side installation unit is installed on the control panel, 180mm or more in depth (including the bending radius of the cable) is required inside the control panel.
(b) Available area for installation When the control panel side installation unit is installed on the control panel, a distance of 25mm or more is required around the unit. Keep a distance of 25mm or more between the control panel side installation unit and the GOT. The control panel side installation unit can be installed in the area shown in the following figure. For the installation, do not give stresses, including an incorrect bending radius of the cable, on the connection cable.
Appendix1 External Dimensions
Unit : mm (inch)
180 or more
(7.09)
500 or less500 or less
(19.69) (19.69)
Available area
for installation
Prohibited area
for installation
25 or less
(0.98)
4 0
0 o
r le s s
(1 5
.7 5
)
6 0
0 o
r le s s
(2 3
.6 2
)
2 5
o r le
s s
(0 .9
8 )
GOT
Unit : mm (inch)
6 - 5 6.3 Mounting Position
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
A LL
AT IO
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
(2) Prohibited area for installation The control panel side installation unit cannot be installed within 25mm (0.98inch) from the GOT. When the CF card extension unit is used with the other extension units, the control panel side installation unit cannot be installed in some areas because the cables of the other extension units get in the way of the control panel side installation unit. The following shows prohibited areas for the installation. (a) For GT1695
The control panel side installation unit cannot be installed within 25mm (0.98inch) from the GOT. (Prohibited areas for the installation with the other extension units do not exist.)
(b) For GT1685 The control panel side installation unit cannot be installed within 25mm (0.98inch) from the GOT. When the other extension units are used, the control panel side installation unit cannot be installed in the areas shown in the following figure.
X
Prohibited area for installation with an extension unit
Unit: mm (inch)
Hole for installing GOT (View from the rear side)
130 80 (3.15)(5.12)
Extension unit Model X (Unit: mm(inch))
Bus connection unit
GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-75ABUSL GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2
-*
GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QBUS2 GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-QBUS
31(1.22)
Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S GT15-RS4-TE
-*
MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25 68(2.68)
GT15-J71BR13 -*
CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit
GT15-J71GP23-SX 16(0.63)
CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit
GT15-J71GF13-T2 -*
CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13 -*
Video input unit GT16M-V4 68(2.68)
RGB input unit GT16M-R2 -*
Video/RGB input unit GT16M-V4R1 68(2.68)
RGB output unit GT16M-ROUT -*
Multimedia unit GT16M-MMR 68(2.68)
Printer unit GT15-PRN -*
CF card extension unit GT15-CFEX-C08SET 56(2.20)
External I/O unit GT15-DIO, GT15-DIOR -*
* Prohibited areas for installing the control panel side installation unit with the extension unit do not exist.
6.3 Mounting Position 6 - 6
(c) For GT1675, GT1672 The control panel side installation unit cannot be installed within 25mm (0.98inch) from the GOT. When the other extension units are used, the control panel side installation unit cannot be installed in the areas shown in the following figure.
X
Prohibited area for installation with an extension unit
Hole for installing GOT (View from the rear side)
130 80 (3.15)(5.12)
Unit: mm (inch)
Extension unit Model X (Unit: mm(inch))
Bus connection unit
GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-75ABUSL GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2
-*1
GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QBUS2 GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-QBUS
40(1.57)
Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S GT15-RS4-TE
-*1
MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25 77(3.03)
GT15-J71BR13 33(1.30)
CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit
GT15-J71GP23-SX 25(0.98)
CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit
GT15-J71GF13-T2 1(0.04)
CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13 -*1
Video input unit *2 GT16M-V4 77(3.03)
RGB input unit *2 GT16M-R2 -*1
Video/RGB input unit *2 GT16M-V4R1 77(3.03)
RGB output unit *2 GT16M-ROUT -*1
Multimedia unit *2 GT16M-MMR 77(3.03)
Printer unit GT15-PRN -*1
CF card extension unit GT15-CFEX-C08SET 65(2.56)
External I/O unit GT15-DIO, GT15-DIOR 26(1.02)
* 1
*2
Prohibited areas for installing the control panel side installation unit with the extension unit do not exist. GT1675-VN, GT1672-VN,GT1662-VN cannot be used.
6 - 7 6.3 Mounting Posi
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
A LL
AT IO
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
(d) For GT1665, GT1662 The control panel side installation unit cannot be installed within 25mm (0.98inch) from the GOT. When the other extension units are used, the control panel side installation unit cannot be installed in the areas shown in the following figure.
X
130 15
Hole for installing GOT
(View from the rear side)
Prohibited area for installation with an extension unit
(5.12) (0.59)
Unit: mm (inch)
Extension unit Model X (Unit: mm(inch))
Bus connection unit
GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-75ABUSL
29(1.14)
GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L
50(1.97)
Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S GT15-RS4-TE
28(1.10)
MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25 87(3.43)
GT15-J71BR13 43(1.69)
CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit
GT15-J71GP23-SX 35(1.38)
CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit
GT15-J71GF13-T2 21(0.83)
CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13 -*1
Video input unit *2 GT16M-V4 87(3.43)
RGB input unit *2 GT16M-R2 32(1.26)
Video/RGB input unit *2 GT16M-V4R1 87(3.43)
RGB output unit *2 GT16M-ROUT 32(1.26)
Multimedia unit *2 GT16M-MMR 87(3.43)
Printer unit GT15-PRN -*1
CF card extension unit GT15-CFEX-C08SET 75(2.95)
External I/O unit GT15-DIO, GT15-DIOR 36(1.42)
* 1
*2
Prohibited areas for installing the control panel side installation unit with the extension unit do not exist. GT1675-VN, GT1672-VN,GT1662-VN cannot be used.
6.3 Mounting Position 6 - 8
(e) For GT1655 The control panel side installation unit cannot be installed within 25mm (0.98inch) from the GOT. When the CF card interface built in the GOT (A drive) is used, the unit cannot be installed within the range of 100mm (3.94inch) (horizontal) 68mm (2.68inch) (vertical) from the right side of the hole for installing GOT, viewed from the rear side. The CF card cannot be installed or removed. When the other extension units are used, the control panel side installation unit cannot be installed in the areas shown in the following figure.
Hole for installing GOT
(View from the rear side)
Prohibited area for installation with an extension unit
Prohibited area for installation with CF card interface (A drive)
X
130 (5.12)
100 (3.94)
15 (0.59)
68 (2 .6
8)
Unit: mm (inch)
Extension unit Model X (Unit: mm(inch))
Bus connection unit
GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-75ABUSL
58(2.28)
GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L
79(3.11)
Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S GT15-RS4-TE
57(2.24)
MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25 116(4.57)
GT15-J71BR13 72(2.83)
CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit
GT15-J71GP23-SX 64(2.52)
CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit
GT15-J71GF13-T2 50(1.97)
CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13 31(1.22)
Printer unit GT15-PRN 36(1.42)
CF card extension unit GT15-CFEX-C08SET 104(4.09)
External I/O unit GT15-DIO, GT15-DIOR 65(2.56)
* 1 Prohibited areas for installing the control panel side installation unit with the extension unit do not exist.
6 - 9 6.3 Mounting Posit
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
A LL
AT IO
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
6.4 Control Panel Inside Temperature and Mounting Angle
When mounting the GOT to a panel or similar, set the display section as shown below. When the temperature inside the control panel is 40 to 55C or less, the mounting angle should be in the range 60 to 105 degrees.
The GOT will be deteriorated earlier if it is used at the mounting angle other than the above. Therefore, the temperature inside the control panel should be within 40C.
* When mounting a multimedia unit (GT16MMMR), MELSECNET/H communication unit (GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13), or CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13), the operating ambient temperature must be reduced 5C against the maximum values described in general specifications.
6.5 Installation Procedure The GOT mounting procedure is as follows. For the panel cutting dimensions of each GOT, refer to the following.
6.2 Panel Cutting Dimensions
1. Before installing the GOT to the panel or others, connect the GOT and battery connectors.
For other than GT1665, GT1662 Open the battery cover.
For GT1655 Open the CF card cover.
For GT1665, GT1662 Remove the battery holder.
GOT
Display
section
Control panel,
etc.
105
60
6.4 Control Panel Inside Temperature and Mounting Angle 6 - 10
2. After confirming the battery is stored in the battery holder, insert the battery connector into the connector of the GOT.
3. Insert the GOT into the panel opening from the front side.
For other than GT1665, GT1662 For GT1655
For GT1665, GT1662
GOT
Panel opening
6 - 11 6.5 Installation Procedure
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
A LL
AT IO
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
4. Place the mounting fixtures (included with GOT) on the mounting fixture attaching part of the GOT, and fix them by tightening the mounting screws in the torque range of 0.36 to 0.48Nm. (Failure to do so may distort the panel and make a surface waviness on the protective sheet.)
5. A protection film is attached on the display section of GOT prior to shipment. Remove the film when the installation is compelted. Remove the protective film of the GOT. When the user continues using the GOT with the protective film, the film may not be removed.
POINT
Precautions after battery connection Make sure to turn on the GOT power supply once upon completion of battery connection. Failure to do somay decrease the battery life.
Magnified figure
For GT1695: Fix the GOT with 8 mounting fixtures. For other then GT1695: Fix the GOT with 4 mounting fixtures.
Magnified figure
6.5 Installation Procedure 6 - 12
6 - 13 6.5 Installation Procedure
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
7. WIRING
This section describes wiring to the GOT power supply section. For the connection to a controller, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2/GT Works2
For external dimensions of connection cable, refer to the following.
Appendix1 External Dimensions
HINT
General preventive measures against noise There are two kinds of noises: Radiated noise that is transmitted into the air and Conductive noise that is directly transmitted along connected lines. Countermeasures must be taken considering both kinds of noises and referring to the following 3 points. (1) Protecting against noise
(a) Keep signal lines away from noise sources such as a power cable or a high-power drive circuit. (b) Shield the signal lines.
(2) Reducing generated noise (a) Use a noise filter, etc. to reduce the level of the noise generated due to a source such as a high-power
motor drive circuit. (b) Attach a surge suppressor on the terminal of the molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), electromagnetic
contactor, relay, solenoid valve, or induction motor to supress the noise. (3) Releasing noise to the ground
(a) Make sure to connect the ground cable to the ground. (b) Use a short and thick cable to lower its ground resistance. (c) Ground the power system and the control system separately.
WARNING Before starting wiring, always switch off the GOT power externally in all phases.
Not doing so may cause an electric shock, product damage or malfunction.
CAUTION Make sure to ground the FG terminal, LG terminal, and functional ground terminal of the GOT power supply
section with a ground resistance of 100 or less solely for the GOT. Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction.
Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrangement of the product. Not doing so can cause a fire or failure.
Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT.
Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT. Not doing so can cause a fire, failure or malfunction.
7 - 1
7.1 Power Supply Wiring Make wiring connections to the power supply, I/O equipment and power equipment separately by system as shown
below. When frequent noise is identified, connect an isolation transformer.
Wiring diagram for power supply
Twist 100V AC, 200V AC or 24V DC cable as closely as possible and connect the cable of the minimum length between modules. Also, use the thickest cable as possible (Max. 2mm2) to minimize the voltage drop. Use M3 solderless terminals and securely tighten them with a tightening torque of 0.5 to 0.8Nm so that no problem will result.
Separate the 100V AC, 200V AC or 24V DC cable from the main circuit lines (high voltage, large current) and/or I/O signal lines. Keep a distance of 100mm or more.
As measures against surge due to lightning, connect a lightning surge absorber as shown below.
Lightning surge absorber connection
POINT
(1) Separate the grounding of the lightning surge absorber (E1) from the grounding of the GOT (E2).
(2) Select an appropriate lightning surge absorber so that the supply voltage does not exceed the maximum allowable circuit voltage of the surge absorber even when it rises to the maximum.
Main power
GOT
T1
I/O equipment
Main circuit equipment
Isolation
transformer GOT
power
I/O power
Main circuit
power
AC
E2
E1
GOT
Lightning surge absorber
7 - 2 7.1 Power Supply Wiring
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
7.2 Wiring to GOT Power Section This section provides an example for connecting power cables and ground cables to the power terminals situated on the back of the GOT.
POINT
(1) Precautions for wiring to the power supply section For 100V AC, 200V AC or 24V DC cable, use the thickest cable as possible (Max. 2mm2) and start twisting
them at the position closest to the connected terminals. To prevent a short circuit due to loose screws, use the solderless terminal with insulation sleeve.
When connection is made between LG and FG terminals, be sure to connect them to the ground. Otherwise, the system becomes susceptible to noise. Since the LG terminal has potential equal to a half of the input voltage, touching the terminal may lead to an electric shock.
When grounding GT1655, ground it to FG on the power terminal block. (Refer to the figure above) The functional grounding FG should be for FG connection such as bus connection cable, CF card extension unit connection cable, or others.
(2) Wiring the power section of the GT1655 when using an extension unit Be sure to wire the power section before connecting a cable to the extension unit. If connecting a cable to the extension unit before wiring the power section, the terminal block of the power section will be blocked by the cable and the power section cannot be wired.
INPUT 100-240VAC
GOT
GOT
INPUT 24VDC
Fuse
In the case of 100VAC
+-
GOT
INPUT 24VDC
Ground cables
Grounding
+-
In the case of 24VDC (GT1695, GT1685, GT1675, GT1672, GT1665, GT1662)
In the case of 24VDC (GT1655)
7.2 Wiring to GOT Power Section 7 - 3
7.3 Grounding
7.3.1 Grounding the GOT
About grounding Perform the following three items for grounding.
Independent grounding should be performed as possible for the GOT. Perform grounding works. (grounding resistance 100 or less)
When independent grounding cannot be performed for the GOT, perform "(2) Shared grounding" shown below.
Use a cable of 2mm2 or more for grounding when performing (1) or (2) above. Ground the cable at a point as close to the GOT as possible to make the ground cable short.
Grounding examples (1) Independent grounding (Best)
* For the control equipment, ground the system at one end. Especially for the control equipments communicating each other, ground the system at one end.
GOT Other device
Grounding
(1) Independent ground ...... Best condition
GOT Other device
Grounding
(2) Shared grounding ...... Good condition
GOT Other device
(3) Common grounding ...... Not allowed
CN1A CN1B
CN2 CN3
FG
LG
FG
FG
LG
Power equipment
(servo, etc.) Connection cable
Ground terminal block Panel
grounding
Grounding for
power system
Ground
terminal
block Grounding for
control system
GOT
7 - 4 7.3 Grounding
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
(2) Shared grounding (Good)
* Ground the system at one end. To prevent noise from entering the GOT, use a short and thick wire for grounding between the ground and the panel to ensure lower ground resistance.
(3) Common grounding (Not allowed)
* Do not connect the ground cables of the power equipment and control equipment with a wire. If the cables are connected, noise from the power equipment may influence the control equipment, causing malfunction.
Recommended terminal shape
Applicable solderless terminal RAV1.25- 3, V2- S3.3, V2- N3A, FV2- N3A
GOT
CN1A CN1B
CN2 CN3
FG
LG
FG
FG
LG
Power equipment
(servo, etc.) Connection cable
Panel
grounding
Use a short and thick cable as much as possible.
Panel
grounding
GOTFG
LG
FG
FG
CN1BCN1A
CN3CN2 LG
Power equipment
(servo, etc.)
Connection cable
The power equipment and
control equipment are
connected with a wire.
Panel grounding Panel grounding
6.2mm
or less
6.2mm
or less
Terminal
screw
Solderless
terminal
Terminal
screw Solderless
terminal
When wiring one cable to
one terminal
When wiring two cables to
one terminal
3.2
3.2
7.3 Grounding 7 - 5
7.3.2 Wiring-related malfunction causes and the measures examples
The malfunction causes in grounding the GOT include potential difference caused by groundings and noise. Potential difference and noise may be reduced by taking the following measures.
Wiring of GOT's ground cable and power line When the ground cable and power line of the GOT are installed together, the GOT may malfunction due to noise. Separating the ground cable and power line of the GOT in wiring reduces the influence of noise.
Leading of the ground cable from the panel having a control equipment in the panel having the GOT When a single ground cable is led from the panel having a control equipment such as PLC in the panel having the GOT, the cable may need to be directly connected to the terminal block of the GOT.
GOT
FGLG
GOT
FGLG
Power for the power equipment Power for the power equipment
Good example: The ground and power cables
are separated in wiring.
Bad example: The ground and power cables are
installed together.
GOT
FG
LG
Ground cable led from the panel
having the control equipment
Connection
cable
7 - 6 7.3 Grounding
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
The malfunction occurred by the potential difference caused by the groundings in such a case, may be prevented by reducing the voltage with the following measure example 1, where the voltage is reduced.
Measure example 1 (Refer to the measure examples 1-1 and 1-2 below.) When any potential difference occurs between the ground cable and the panel having the GOT and the GOT is influenced by the potential difference, connect another ground cable to the panel. When taking of measure 1-1 is difficult since the wiring cannot be done for example, perform the wiring as shown in 1-2.
If the GOT is affected by noise when measure example 1 is taken, the influence of noise may be reduced with the following measure example 2.
Measure example 2 (Refer to the measure examples 2-1 and 2-2 below.) When the noise generated from the panel affects the GOT even if measure example 1 is taken, attach the ferrite core (KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES CO.,LTD. RFC-H13 or equivalent product). When attaching a ferrite core, insert the wire into the hole of the ferrite core several times (approximately three times). When taking of measure 2-1 is difficult since the wiring cannot be done for example, perform the wiring as shown in 2-2.
Measure example 1-1 Measure example 1-2
Measure example 2-1 Measure example 2-2
GOT
FG
LG
Use a short
and thick
wire as
possible.
Ground cable
Ground to
the panel.
Connection
cable
GOT
FG
LGGround cable
Connection
cable
Ground to
the panel.
GOT
FG
LG
Ground cable
Use a short
and thick
wire as
possible.
Connection
cable
Ferrite core
Ground to
the panel.
GOT
FG
LGGround cable
Ferrite core
Ground to
the panel.
Connection
cable
7.3 Grounding 7 - 7
7.4 Panel Inside Wiring, Panel Outside Wiring
7.4.1 Panel inside wiring
In wiring, the power line connected to the power or servo amplifier and the communication cable such as bus connection cable or network cable must not be mixed. Mixing the power line and communication cable may cause malfunction due to noise. When using an equipment that may occur surge noise, such as molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), electromagnetic contactor (MC), relay (RA), solenoid valve, or induction motor, using a surge suppressor is effective. For surge suppressor, refer to the following.
7.5 Attaching Surge Suppressor for Control Equipment
7.4.2 Panel outside wiring
When leading the power line and communication cable outside the panel, open cable holes at two separate places to lead the cables separately out. If cables are led out through the same cable hole for wiring reasons, the cables are more easily influenced by noise.
Install the power line and communication cable as apart from each other as possible in the duct. If the cables are installed closely with each other for wiring reasons, using a separator (made of metal) can make the cables less influenced by noise.
Wiring for leading the power line and communication cable out from the panel
Wiring of power lines and communication cables in the duct
PLC's I/O wire PLC's I/O wire
NFB
MC MC RA RA
NFB
MC MC RA RA
Separated power lines and communication cables Mixed power lines and communication cables
Power cable Power cableControl panel inside Control panel inside
GOT
connection
cable
GOT
connection
cable
Drive control
wire
Drive control
wire
Terminal block Terminal block
Communication
cable
Communication
cable
Power line
Power line
Cable hole
100mm or more
Power line Wiring duct
Power line Signal line
Communication cable
Separator
7 - 8 7.4 Panel Inside Wiring, Panel Outside Wiring
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
7.5 Attaching Surge Suppressor for Control Equipment If an improper operation such as communication error occurs in the GOT in synchronization with ON/OFF of a particular control equipment (hereinafter abbreviated to load) such as MCCB, electromagnetic contactor, relay, solenoid valve, or induction motor, the GOT may be influenced by surge noise. In such a case, install the ground cable or communication cable apart from the load. If the ground cable or communication cable has to be installed close to the load unavoidably, attaching a surge suppressor is effective. Attach the surge suppressor at the position closest to the load.
Measures for AC inductive load
Measures for DC inductive load
AC
C
R L
The GOT's ground cable and communication cable
must not be installed close to the load.
Output equipment
such as PLC's
output module
The surge suppressor must be
attached close to the load
Output
DC
D L
The GOT's ground cable and communication cable
must not be installed close to the load.
Output equipment
such as PLC's
output module
The surge suppressor must be
attached close to the load
Output
7.5 Attaching Surge Suppressor for Control Equipment 7 - 9
7.6 Grounding Extension Units
7.6.1 Wiring FG cable of bus connection cable
This section describes wiring of the FG cable when a PLC CPU is connected to the GOT.
POINT
Cable connected to the PLC CPU Do not install the connection cable together with the main circuit lines (high voltage, large current) or I/O signal lines.
When connecting QCPU or motion controller CPU (Q series) to the GOT Grounding of the FG cable for QCPU and motion controller CPU (Q series) is not necessary since they have no FG wire.
When connecting QnACPU, ACPU, or motion controller CPU (A series) to the GOT When using GT15-C EXSS-1 or GT15-C BS, perform the grounding in the following steps.
POINT
(1) GOT terminal block The terminal block layout of a GOT differs depending on the model. Before wiring, check the terminal layout of the GOT to be used.
(2) Ground cables Up to two ground cables can be connected to the LG and FG terminals of the GOT respectively. For three or more ground cables, connect the third or later ground cables to the LG terminal.
7 - 10 7.6 Grounding Extension Units
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
(1) When using GT15-C EXSS-1
(2) When using GT15-C BS For the both side GOTs, connect the LG and FG terminals of the terminal block on the GOT unit power and ground them with a cable.
7.6.2 Wiring FG cable of CF card extension unit connection cable
The following explains wiring the FG cable when the CF card extension unit is installed on the GOT.
POINT
(1) Cables to be connected to CF card extension unit Do not install the connection cable together with the main circuit lines (high voltage, large current) and I/O signal lines.
(2) GOT terminal block The terminal block layout of a GOT differs depending on the model. Before wiring, check the terminal layout of the GOT to be used.
(3) Ground cables Up to two ground cables can be connected to the LG and FG terminals of the GOT respectively. For three or more ground cables, connect the third or later ground cables to the LG terminal.
1. Connect the LG and FG terminals of the terminal block on the GOT unit power and ground them with a cable.
2. Use the GT15-C BS's FG cable of 28cm or less.
3. Do not connect the GT15-EXCNB's FG ground cable.
4. Connect the GT15-C BS's FG cable on the GOT side to FG of the GOT unit power's terminal block.
5. Connect the GT15-C BS's FG cable on the PLC side to FG of the PLC's power supply module.
6. Connect the LG and FG terminals of the terminal block on the PLC and ground them with a cable.
FG
LG
N
L
(GT15-EXCNB)
OUT IN
FGLGNL
(GT15-C BS)
Not connected
PLC
2SQ cables to
FG terminals,
28cm or less
GOT
7.6 Grounding Extension Units 7 - 11
When the CF card extension unit is used, ground the ground cable as shown below.
1. Make the connections as shown below.
2. Connect the ground cable.
For the ground cable of the connection cable, use the following solderless terminals.
For grounding the GOT, refer to the following. 7.2 Wiring to GOT Power Section
For other than GT1655 For GT1655
For other than GT1655 Install the shorting bar to the LG and FG terminals of the GOT's power.
For GT1655 The shorting bar is not required.
For other than GT1655 Connect the ground cable of the connection cable with the GOT's ground cable to the FG terminal of the GOT's power. For connecting the ground cables, each flat side of the two solderless terminals must be faced.
For GT1655 Connect the ground cable of the connection cable to the functional ground terminal and connect the ground cable of GOT to the FG terminal of the GOT power supply.
Applicable solderless terminal RAV1.25-3, V1.25-B3A, FV1.25-B3A
GOT GT15-CFEXIF
GT15-C08CF
FGLGNL
GOT GT15-CFEXIF
GT15-C08CF
FG +24V24G
Functional grounding
L
L N LG FG
Shorting bar
FG 24G +24VFunctional grounding
L N LG FG
Ground cable of GOT
Ground cable of connection cable
FG 24G +24VFunctional grounding
Terminal screw
Solderless terminal
Shorting bar
7 - 12 7.6 Grounding Extension Units
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
8. OPTION
When GT16 is used with a communication unit or option unit, monitoring is not possible because the GOT cannot recognize the unit using the standard monitor OS and communication driver of the version before GT Designer3 Version 1.00A or GT Designer2 Version 2.87R.
8.1 Communication Unit The communication unit is used to relate the GOT extension interfaces to the system at the connection destination. To connect the communication unit, make Communication Settings for communications with a PLC. For details of connection, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2/GT Works2
8.1.1 Applicable communication unit
The following communication units are applicable for GT16.
For how to install a communication unit, refer to the use's manual for the communication unit used. The communication unit can be installed on another extension unit.
8.1.2 Installing multiple extension units in layers
Product name Model Description
Bus connection unit
GT15-QBUS For QCPU (Q mode)/motion controller CPU (Q series) connection (standard model)
For last GOT, Number of IN side connectors: 1
GT15-QBUS2 For intermediary and last GOT, Number of IN and OUT side connectors: 1 for each side
GT15-ABUS For A/QnACPU/motion controller CPU (A series) connection (standard model)
For last GOT, Number of IN side connectors: 1
GT15-ABUS2 For intermediary and last GOT, Number of IN and OUT side connectors: 1 for each side
GT15-75QBUSL For QCPU (Q mode)/motion controller CPU (Q series) connection (slim model)
For last GOT, Number of IN side connectors: 1
GT15-75QBUS2L For intermediary and last GOT, Number of IN and OUT side connectors: 1 for each side
GT15-75ABUSL For A/QnACPU/motion controller CPU (A series) connection (slim model)
For last GOT, Number of IN side connectors: 1
GT15-75ABUS2L For intermediary and last GOT, Number of IN and OUT side connectors: 1 for each side
Serial communication unit
GT15-RS2-9P For RS-232 interface connection, connector type
GT15-RS4-9S For RS-422 interface connection, connector type
GT15-RS4-TE For RS-422 interface connection, terminal block type
MELSECNET/H communication unit
GT15-J71LP23-25 Optical double loop unit
GT15-J71BR13 Coaxial bus unit
CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit
GT15-J71GP23-SX Optical loop unit
CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit
GT15-J71GF13-T2 Intelligent device station unit
CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13 Intelligent device station unit CC-LINK Ver. 2 compliant
Serial multi-drop connection unit
GT01-RS4-M GOT multidrop connection unit
8.1 Communication Unit 8 - 1
8.1.2 Installing multiple extension units in layers
This section describes how to install another extension units on the extension units that has been installed on the GOT.
1. Remove the connector cover and sticker from the installed extension units.
2. Install the unit on the unit that has been installed.
3. After installing the unit, fasten it by tightening the mounting screws (2 places) with tightening torque of 0.36 to 0.48Nm.
4. When installing another extension unit on the unit that has been installed, implement the above operations of step 1 to 3.When not installing an extension unit on the unit that has been installed, in order to avoid receiving electrostatic, stick accessory stickers to cover the top of mounting screws. Keep the connector cover fixed. Keep the sticker stuck as it is.
Connector cover
Sticker
Sticker
Accessory
stickers
Connector
cover
8 - 2 8.1 Communication Unit
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
POINT
(1) Installation position for a communication unit that occupies two extend interfaces Install a communication unit that occupies two extend interfaces, such as the following, directly to the GOT main unit. It cannot be installed on the back stage of another communication unit. If a video/RGB unit or multimedia unit has been installed, install the communication unit on the back stage of that video/RGB unit or multimedia unit. Bus connection unit (GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-75ABUS2L only) MELSECNET/H communication unit CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13)
(2) Installing the GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L These cannot be installed on the back stage of a video/RGB unit or multimedia unit. For bus connection, use the GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS, or GT15-ABUS2.
(3) Removing a video/RGB unit, multimedia unit, bus connection unit (GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS2), MELSECNET/H communication unit, CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit, CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13) Before removing the unit, unscrew the extension interface relay board fixing screws. Option unit Bus connection unit (GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS2) MELSECNET/H communication unit CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13)
8.1 Communication Unit 8 - 3
8.2 Option Unit The option unit is used to relate the GOT extension interfaces to the system at the connection destination. To connect the option unit, make Communication Settings for communications with a controller. For details of connection, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT Works3 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2/GT Works2
8.2.1 Applicable option unit
The following option units are applicable for GT16.
*1 GT1675-VN, GT1672-VN, GT1662-VN, GT1655-V cannot be used. *2 Set to [ON] by [5V supply] at [Communication settings] of the utility. *3 GT1655-V cannot be used.
(Basic Utility) 3.1.4 Communication setting operation
For how to install an option unit, refer to the use's manual for the option unit used. The option unit can be installed on another extension unit.
8.1.2 Installing multiple extension units in layers
POINT
RGB unit and one video/multimedia unit can be installed only in the first step in the enhancing interface. Are the printer unit, the external I/O unit, and the voice output unit the first steps in the enhancing interface One can be installed in the third step.
Item Product name Model Description
Video/RGB
unit*1
Video input unit GT16M-V4 For video input signal 4 channels NTSC format / PAL format compliant
RGB input unit GT16M-R2 For analog RGB input signal 2 channels -
Video/RGB input unit
GT16M-V4R1 For video input signal 4 channels, for analog RGB input signal 1 channel
NTSC format / PAL format compliant
RGB output unit GT16M-ROUT For analog RGB output signal 1 channel -
Multimedia unit*1 GT16M-MMR For video input signal 1 channel
NTSC format / PAL format compliant
Printer unit GT15-PRN For connecting a printer 1 channel
USB slave (PictBridge) 1 channel
External I/O unit
GT15-DIO For connecting an external I/O device/ operation panel
(Positive Common Input/Sink Type Output)
GT15-DIOR (Negative Common Input/Source Type Output)
Sound output unit GT15-SOUT For sound output -
CF card unit and CF card extension unit
CF card unit GT15-CFCD For CF card installation (B drive)
-
CF card extension unit
GT15-CFEX- C08SET
For CF card installation (B drive)
-
RS-422 conversion unit*2*3 GT15-RS2T4-9P
RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit RS-422 side connector 9 pins
GT15-RS2T4-25P RS-422 side connector 25 pins
8 - 4 8.2 Option Unit
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
8.3 Option Options are used for the expansion of GOT functions, parts replacement or maintenance.
8.3.1 Applicable option
The following options are applicable for GT16.
Product name Mode Description Reference
CF card*1*2
GT05-MEM-16MC Flash ROM 16MB
8.3.2 CF card
GT05-MEM-32MC Flash ROM 32MB
GT05-MEM-64MC Flash ROM 64MB
GT05-MEM-128MC Flash ROM 128MB
GT05-MEM-256MC Flash ROM 256MB
GT05-MEM-512MC Flash ROM 512MB
GT05-MEM-1GC Flash ROM 1GB
GT05-MEM-2GC Flash ROM 2GB
GT05-MEM-4GC*6 Flash ROM 4GB
GT05-MEM-8GC*6 Flash ROM 8GB
GT05-MEM-16GC*6 Flash ROM 16GB
Commercially-available CF card *3
Memory card adaptor GT05-MEM-ADPC Converts the CF card into a memory card 8.3.2 Memory card adaptor
Option function board GT16-MESB For MES interface function board 8.3.2 Option function board
Battery
GT15-BAT Battery for backup of clock data, maintenance time notification data, system status log (For 15", 12.1", 10.4", 8.4")
8.3.2 Battery
GT11-50BAT Battery for backup of clock data, maintenance time notification data, system status log (For 5.7")
Protective sheet
GT16-90PSCB
Protection sheet for 15"
Clear 5 sheets
8.3.2 Protective sheet
GT16-90PSGB Antiglare 5 sheets
GT16-90PSCW*4 Clear (Frame: White) 5 sheets
GT16-90PSGW*4 Antiglare (Frame: White) 5 sheets
GT16-90PSCB-012*7 Clear (covered USB environmental protection cover type) 5 sheets
GT16-80PSCB
Protection sheet for 12.1"
Clear 5 sheets
GT16-80PSGB Antiglare 5 sheets
GT16-80PSCW*4 Clear (Frame: White) 5 sheets
GT16-80PSGW*4 Antiglare (Frame: White) 5 sheets
GT16-90PSCB-012*7 Clear (covered USB environmental protection cover type) 5 sheets
GT16-70PSCB
Protection sheet for 10.4"
Clear 5 sheets
GT16-70PSGB Antiglare 5 sheets
GT16-70PSCW*4 Clear (Frame: White) 5 sheets
GT16-70PSGW*4 Antiglare (Frame: White) 5 sheets
GT16-90PSCB-012*7 Clear (covered USB environmental protection cover type) 5 sheets
8.3 Option 8 - 5
*1 The flash PC card of the GOT-A900 series In the GT16, the flash PC card for GOT-A900 series cannot be used. Use the CF card which is described in the above.
*2 To install a CF card to a multimedia unit, formatting in FAT32 is recommended. *3 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable.
For the validated models, refer to Technical News GOT-A-0010 "List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT1000 Series" separately available, or contact your local distributor.
*4 For the white frame (other than the display section), use the model. *5 Note that this does not guarantee all users' operation environment.
In addition, the GOT may not be available for use in the environment where oil or chemicals are splashed over for a long period or where oil mist is filled.
*6 A CF card with more than 2GB can be used for the GT16 with the following versions of OSes installed. Boot OS version: 05.09.00AF or later Standard monitor OS version: 05.09.00 or later If the above versions of OSes are not installed, install the OSes to the GOT by using GT Designer3 Version1.17T or later. If the OS version is earlier than the above OS versions, a CF card with more than 2GB is not recognized correctly. GT Designer2 Version is not supported.
*7 The USB interface on the GOT front face cannot be used with this item.
Protective sheet
GT16-60PSCB
Protection sheet for 8.4"
Clear 5 sheets
8.3.2 Protective sheet
GT16-60PSGB Antiglare 5 sheets
GT16-60PSCW*4 Clear (Frame: White) 5 sheets
GT16-60PSGW*4 Antiglare (Frame: White) 5 sheets
GT16-90PSCB-012*7 Clear (covered USB environmental protection cover type) 5 sheets
GT16-50PSCB
Protection sheet for 5.7"
Clear 5 sheets
GT16-50PSGB Antiglare 5 sheets
GT16-50PSCW*4 Clear (Frame: White) 5 sheets
GT16-50PSGW*4 Antiglare (Frame: White) 5 sheets
GT16-90PSCB-012*7 Clear (covered USB environmental protection cover type) 5 sheets
Protective cover for oil*5
GT05-90PCO For 15" GOT
8.3.2 Protective cover for oil
GT05-80PCO For 12.1" GOT
GT05-70PCO For 10.4" GOT
GT05-60PCO For 8.4" GOT
GT16-50PCO For 5.7" GOT
USB environmental protection cover*5
GT16-UCOV Environmental cover for USB interface on the GOT main unit front side (For complying IP67) (For 15", 12.1", 10.4", 8.4") 8.3.2 USB
environmental protection coverGT16-50UCOV
Environmental cover for USB interface on the GOT main unit front side (For complying IP67) (For 5.7")
Stand
GT15-90STAND Stand for 15"
8.3.2 Stand GT15-80STAND Stand for 12.1"
GT15-70STAND Stand for 10.4"/8.4"
GT05-50STAND Stand for 5.7"
Attachment
GT15-70ATT-98 Attachment for 10.4" Replaceable to GT1675
8.3.2 Attachment
GT15-70ATT-87
GT15-60ATT-97
Attachment for 8.4" Replaceable to GT1665 GT15-60ATT-96
GT15-60ATT-87
GT15-60ATT-77
GT15-50ATT-95W Attachment for 5.7" Replaceable to GT1655
GT15-50ATT-85
Product name Mode Description Reference
8 - 6 8.3 Option
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
8.3.2 Installation procedure
This section describes how to install a option on a GOT.
CF card (1) CF card inserting/removing method with CF card interface of GOT
Install/remove the CF card with the power supply of GOT is OFF or CF card access switch is OFF. (a) Installing
1. Turn the CF card access switch of the GOT off.
2. Open the cover of the CF card interface. Insert and install the CF card into the CF card interface with its front side outside.
3. Close the cover of the CF card interface. Set the CF card access switch to ON.
For other than GT1655 For GT1655
For other than GT1655 For GT1655
For other than GT1655 For GT1655
ACCESS
OFF ON
OFF ON
ACCESS
CF Card top face
CF Card top face
ACCESS
OFF ON
OFF ON
ACCESS
8.3 Option 8 - 7
(b) Removing
1. Set the CF card access switch of the GOT to OFF, and make sure that the CF card access LED turns off. (When the CF card access LED turns off, the CF card can be removed even during the GOT power on.)
2. Open the cover of the CF card interface.
3. Push the CF card eject button of the GOT to lift the CF card and remove it.
For other than GT1655 For GT1655
For other than GT1655 For GT1655 Press the CF card eject button, and then the button pops out.
For other than GT1655 For GT1655
ACCESS
OFF ON
OFF ON
ACCESS
8 - 8 8.3 Option
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
POINT
Precautions for removing the CF card
(1) While the CF card access LED is on, do not install/remove the CF card or power off the GOT. To do so may cause data corruption or malfunction.
(2) When ejecting the CF card, support it by hand since it may pop out. Failure to do so may cause a fall of the CF card leading to failure or damage of the card.
(2) CF card inserting/removing method with multimedia unit or CF card unit (a) Installing
1. Open the CF card cover and turn off the CF card access switch of the unit.
When using the multimedia unit When using the CF card unit
2. Insert the CF card into the CF card connector with the face out.
When using the multimedia unit When using the CF card unit
3. Turn on the CF card access switch.
8.3 Option 8 - 9
(b) Removal
1. Open the CF card cover. Turn off the CF card access switch of the unit and check that the CF card access LED turns off. (When the LED turns off, the CF card can be removed even while the GOT is on.)
When using the multimedia unit When using the CF card unit
2. Press the CF card eject button to pop out the CF card and remove it.
When using the multimedia unit When using the CF card unit
POINT
Precautions for removing CF card
(1) Do not insert or eject a CF card, and do not turn off the GOT while the CF card access LED turns on. Failure to do so might cause a data damage in the CF card and a malfunction with the CF card unit.
(2) When a CF card is removed from the CF card unit, support the card with the hand, because the card might pop out. Failure to do so might cause the CF card to drop from the unit, resulting in a damage or failure of the card.
8 - 10 8.3 Option
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
(3) CF card inserting/removing method with CF card extension unit Install/remove the CF card with the power supply of GOT is OFF or CF card access switch is OFF. (a) Installation
1. When the CF card cover is fixed with the CF card cover fixing screw, unscrew the screw.
2. Open the CF card cover, and turn off the CF card access switch of the unit.
3. Insert the CF card into the CF card connector with the front side facing up.
4. Turn on the CF card access switch.
(b) Removal
1. When the CF card cover is fixed with the CF card cover fixing screw, unscrew the screw.
8.3 Option 8 - 11
2. Open the CF card cover. Turn off the CF card access switch and check that the CF card access LED turns off. (The CF card can be removed when the CF card access LED turns off even though the GOT's power is on.)
3. Press the CF card eject button, and then the button pops out. Press the button again, and then the CF card pops out. Remove the card.
POINT
Precautions for removing CF card
(1) Do not insert or eject a CF card, and do not turn off the GOT while the CF card access LED turns on. Failure to do so might cause a data damage in the CF card and a malfunction with the CF card unit.
(2) When a CF card is removed from the CF card unit, support the card with the hand, because the card might pop out. Failure to do so might cause the CF card to drop from the unit, resulting in a damage or failure of the card.
Memory card adaptor The memory card adaptor is used to convert the CF card into the memory card (Type II). The memory card (Type II) is used to transmit the OS, project data and to save the data of alarm history function or other functions by installing it to the PC which is equipped with the PCMCIA interface. Refer to the following for the details related to CF card.
8.3 Option
1. Fit the memory card in the memory card adaptor.
CF card Memory card
adaptor
8 - 12 8.3 Option
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
Option function board
1. Power OFF the GOT.
2. Remove the extension unit cover (Interface 1 side) of GOT rear face. For GT1655-V, remove the extension unit cover (Interface 2 side).
3. Install the option function board in the option function board interface. (When the extension unit is installed in GOT, remove the installed extension unit. And, do not touch the board in the GOT when install the option function board.)
4. After the installation, tighten a fixing screw within the specified torque range (0.25 to 0.35Nm).
5. After the installation of option function board, attach the extension unit cover. (For installation of extension unit, install the extension unit.)
8.3 Option 8 - 13
Battery Replace battery periodically by referring to 3.4 Battery Specifications.
1. Keep the GOT power supply on for 10 minutes or more, and turn it off. (Executes step 1 to 6 within 5 minutes of powering the GOT power supply off.)
2. The battery is stored in the back of the GOT. Replace the battery as shown in the following figure.
3. Remove the old battery from the GOT and disconnect the connector.
4. Connect the new battery to the connector.
5. After installing the battery to the GOT, put back the cable in place and store the battery in the reverse procedure of step 2.
6. Turn the GOT power supply on.
7. Check if the battery condition is normal within the utility. Refer to the following for the details of battery status display.
(Basic Utility) 2.1.1 Time setting
POINT
(1) Precautions after battery replacement Make sure to turn on the GOT power supply once upon completion of battery replacement. Failure to do so may decrease the battery life.
(2) When the 2- slot type extension unit is connected to GT1665, GT1662. Before installing or replacing the battery, disconnect the unit. (When connecting or disconnecting the unit, be sure to power off the GOT and PLC.)
For GT1695,GT1685,GT1675, GT1672 Open the battery cover.
For GT1655 Open the CF card cover
For GT1665, GT1662 Remove the battery holder.
8 - 14 8.3 Option
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
Protective sheet
1. If the old protective sheet is attached, remove the sheet from the lower right of the GOT, and clean the GOT surface. (Peel off the sheet slowly.)
2. Peel the release paper off the back of the new protective sheet. With the protective film left on the sheet surface, attach the sheet on the GOT so that the USB environmental protection cover hole is just on the USB environmental protection cover of the GOT. For the protective sheet (covered USB environmental protection cover type), attach the sheet on the GOT so that the LED hole is just on the POWER LED section of the GOT.
3. Make sure to fit the sheet on the GOT without wrinkles or air between the sheet and the GOT.
4. Remove the protective film from the protective sheet. When the user continues using the GOT with the protective film, the film may not be removed.
For protective sheet For protective sheet
(covered USB environmental protection cover type)
For protective sheet For protective sheet
(covered USB environmental protection cover type)
8.3 Option 8 - 15
POINT
Precautions for using the protective sheet (covered USB environmental protection cover type) When the protective sheet (covered USB environmental protection cover type) is used, the USB interface on the GOT front face cannot be used.
HINT
Replacement time of protective sheet Check the status of the protection sheet visually by to the daily inspection. The visibility becomes worse when there is too much dirt and cracks, causing malfunction. Proceeds replacement promptly.
8 - 16 8.3 Option
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
Protective cover for oil
POINT
Before attaching protective cover for oil For attaching the protective cover for oil to the GOT already mounted on the control panel, follow the procedures as below.
Remove the GOT from the control panel. Make sure to externally shut off all phases of the power supply and remove all cables from the GOT in advance.
Clean dirt off surfaces of the GOT and control panel.
1. Position the POWER LED frame of the cover to the POWER LED on the GOT front face, and the direction of the cover is decided.
2. One corner of the cover is pulled outside, and it hangs it on the corner of the front panel of GOT.
3. The oil cover was hung and the edge of the oil cover is sequentially obtained and obtain the oil cover to cover rubber packing parts in the back of GOT of the front panel. (It is the order of the arrow from A side to D side.)
Protective cover for oil
POWER LED frame
POWER LED
GOT
Protective cover for oil
The corner is hung.
Please do not pull the oil cover more than
the necessity, and do not bend it extremely.
The seat part and the rubber part in the display
part might flake off.
GOT
The corner on the left is hung and the oil cover is hung
from A side to D side on the starting point sequentially.
A
B
C
D
8.3 Option 8 - 17
POINT
Before mounting the GOT onto the control panel. Please confirm all surroundings. Whether the rubber packing part is surely covered to prevent going into such as the liquids in the board.
4. Mount the GOT onto the control panel. When the control panel is dirty, clean the control panel. The panel cutting dimensions and mounting screw tightening torque with the protective cover for oil are the same as those without the cover. For how to mount the GOT onto the control panel, refer to the following.
6. INSTALLATION
POINT
Precautions for protective cover for oil The protective cover for oil is a consumable product.
Check the cover for scratch, damage or dirt at regular intervals, and replace with new one if necessary. Do not push the protective cover for oil with pointed tools, including mechanical pencils and screwdrivers.
Doing so causes scratches and damages of the cover. Do not clean the protective cover for oil with bleaches, thinners, organic solvents, corrosive chemicals, and
others. Doing so causes changes in shape and color of the cover. When the protective cover for oil is attached to the GOT, do not stretch and bend the cover too much.
Doing so may cause a separation between the sheet and rubber. Do not place or use the protective cover for oil in direct sunshine. When the protective cover for oil gets dusts, wipe the dusts off with a damp cloth. When the protective cover for oil is used, the USB interface on the GOT front face cannot be used. When the protective cover for oil is used, the human sensor does not correctly operate.
Disable the human sensor with the utility. For the human sensor setting, refer to GT16 User's Manual.
(Basic Utility) 2.2.3 Display setting operations Do not attach and remove the protective cover for oil frequently.
Doing so reduces oil resistance and chemical resistance. This cover does not guarantee protection in all environments.
This cover may not be appropriate for use in environments where it is exposed to oil and chemicals for a long time or environments with large amounts of oil mist.
Make sure that corners of protective cover for oil match those of GOT front.
Protectivecover for oil
Panel cut dimensions
Mounting metal fixture
Control panel
8 - 18 8.3 Option
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
USB environmental protection cover The USB environment cover protects the USB interface on the front face of GOT from dust, water, and oil.*1
The GOT is installed with the USB environment cover at factory shipment. Replace when damage and deterioration are caused.
*1 Note that this does not guarantee all users' operation environment. In addition, the GOT may not be available for use in the environment where oil or chemicals are splashed over for a long period or where oil mist is filled.
1. Get up the hinge of the USB environmental protection cover.
2. Put the provided fixing screw through the hinge hole, and then fit the screw in the cover installation hole on the GOT.
3. Tighten the screw with a torque of 0.36 to 0.48Nm. Fitting the hinge projections in the GOT guiding holes makes the cover installation work easier.
4. When the USB interface is not used, fix the cover by pushing the mark on the latch firmly.
5. When the USB interface is used, unfix the latch to open the cover, and then connect the USB cable.
POINT
Precautions for use USB environment cover When the USB environmental protection cover is closed, the USB interface complies with the protective structure IP67. In this case, the USB environmental protection cover must be fixed by pushing the mark on the latch firmly. Environmental protective structure of USB interface is "IP2X" when the USB environmental cover is opened.
Fixing screw
8.3 Option 8 - 19
Stand
1. Set the stand so that the front side of the GOT to be mounted faces the front.
2. Adjust the mounting angle of GOT with the angle adjusting screw of the stand.
3. Put the GOT into the Stand from the front side and fix it using the fixtures. For the GOT mounting method, refer to the following.
6.5 Installation Procedure
Attachment (1) GT15-70ATT-98, GT15-60ATT-97, GT15-60ATT-96, GT15-60ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-77
The following figures show an example of the GT15-60ATT-97 installation. Follow the same procedure for installing the other models.
1. The model is indicated on the attachment. The upper part of the attachment has the model indication. (Example of model indication)
2. Hang the two upper hooks on the upper part over the mounting holes in the control panel. Refer to the figure shown in step1.
3. While lifting the attachment upward, hang the two lower hooks on the lower part of the control panel.
4. Fix the attachment to the control panel with four clamp screws in the torque range of 0.2 to 0.28Nm.
5. Place the GOT into the attachment from the front, and fix it by tightening the mounting screws included with the GOT in the torque range of 0.36 to 0.48Nm.
Upper part
Lower part
Upper
part
Lower part
Model
8 - 20 8.3 Option
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
(2) GT15-70ATT-87, GT15-50ATT-95W, GT15-50ATT-85
POINT
Precautions for installing the attachment The attachment can be used when the mounting panel thickness is 2 to 3mm.
If the installation panel thickness exceeds 3mm, the GOT cannot be replaced by using the attachment. Replacing GOT with the attachment does not compliant with the standard IP65, IP67, NEMA4 of the waterproof
and dustproof.
1. The model is indicated on the attachment. The position of the model indication does not affect the performance of the attachment. (Example of model indication)
2. Remove two-sided tapes from the rear face of the attachment.
3. Fix the attachment to fit the mouting hole on the control panel. If the control panel is dirty, the attachment might fall, causing an injury. Wipe the control panel, and then install the attachment.
4. Place the GOT into the attachment from the front, and fix it by tightening the mounting screws included with the GOT in the torque range of 0.36 to 0.48Nm.
Upper part
Lower part
Model
8.3 Option 8 - 21
8.4 Cable Cables are used for connecting the GOT to a PLC, temperature controller, etc. Refer to the following for the details of connection statuses.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2/GT Works2
8.4.1 Applicable cable
The following cables are applicable for GT16. This section shows the conversion cable for connecting to the RS-422/485 interface. Refer to the following for cables other than the connection cable for RS-422/485 interface.
2.2.2 Option
8.4.2 Installing procedure
This section describes how to install the RS-422 connector conversion cable or the RS-485 connector terminal block conversion modules with cable to the RS-422/485 connector of GOT.
RS-422 connector conversion cable or RS-485 connector terminal block conversion modules with cable
1. Power off the GOT.
2. Insert the 14-pin side connector of the RS-422 connector conversion cable or the RS-485 connector terminal block conversion modules with cable to the RS-422/485 interface of GOT until it clicks.
Product name Model Description
RS-422 connector conversion cable
GT16-C02R4-9S RS-422/485 (connector) RS-422 connector conversion cable
RS-422 side connector 9pins
RS-485 connector terminal block conversion modules with cable
FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 Cable length 0.5m RS-422/485 (connector) RS-485 (terminal block) converter module with dedicated connection cable
FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 Cable length 1.0m
FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 Cable length 2.0m
8 - 22 8.4 Cable
1
O VE
R VI
EW
2
SY ST
EM
C O
N FI
G U
R AT
IO N
3
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
4
PA R
T N
AM E
AN D
SE
TT IN
G S
5
EM C
A N
D L
O W
VO
LT AG
E D
IR EC
TI VE
6
IN ST
AL LA
TI O
N
7
W IR
IN G
8
O PT
IO N
8.5 Other Equipments Connected to the Main Unit This section shows the equipments that can be connected to the GOT. To connect a connectable equipment to the GOT, make Communication Settings for communications with an equipment. For details of connection, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT Works3 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2/GT Works2
8.5.1 Applicable other equipments connected to the main unit
The following equipments are applicable for GT16.
*1 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable. For the validated models, refer to Technical News GOT-A-0010 "List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT1000 Series" separately available, or contact your local distributor.
8.5.2 Installation procedure
This section describes how to install equipment that can be used on the GOT.
Connect a bar code reader or RFID controller To connect a bar code reader or RFID controller, make Communication Settings for communications with a bar code reader or RFID controller. For details of connection, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT Works3 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2/GT Works2
Install USB peripheral devices
1. Open the USB environmental protection cover and firmly insert a USB peripheral devices connector to the USB interface so that the GOT automatically recognizes the USB memory. For removing methods of the USB peripheral devices, refer to the following.
(Basic Utility) 4.3.7 USB device status display
2. For installing a USB mouse/keyboard, make the settings to use it.
3. For how to set, refer to the following.
(Basic Utility) 2.3.7 USB mouse/keyboard setting
Product name Model Description
USB peripheral devices
USB memory - Commercially-available USB memory*1
USB mouse - Commercially-available USB mouse*1
USB keyboard - Commercially-available USB keyboard*1
USB hub - Commercially-available USB hub*1
Bar code reader - Commercially-available bar code reader*1
RFID controller - Commercially-available RFID controller*1
8.5 Other Equipments Connected to the Main Unit 8 - 23
POINT
Precautions for using a USB mouse/keyboard (1) When using the mouse with wheel or special mouse
A mouse with wheel or a mouse with three or more buttons can be used as a two buttons mouse. The wheel or special button cannot be used. In addition, a mouse with special functions cannot be used in some models.
(2) When using upper compatible models of the Japanese 106 keyboard/English 101 keyboard, or special keyboards For using upper compatible models of the Japanese 106 keyboard/English 101 keyboard (Japanese 109 keyboard/English 104 keyboard), keys that do not exist in the Japanese 106 keyboard/English 101 keyboard cannot be used. In addition, a special keyboard such as with the hub function cannot be used with some models.
HINT
For installing multiple USB peripheral devices To install multiple peripheral devices, install the USB hub to the GOT and then install the USB peripheral devices to the USB interface of the USB hub.
8 - 24 8.5 Other Equipments Connected to the Main Unit
9
M A
IN TE
N A
N C
E A
N D
IN
SP EC
TI O
N
10
TR O
U BL
ES H
O O
TI N
G AP
PE N
D IC
ES
9. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
The GOT does not include consumable components that will cause the shorten life. However, the battery, liquid crystal screen and backlight have each life length. It is recommended to replace the battery and the cold cathode tube backlight periodically. (For the replacement of the liquid crystal screen, please consult Mitsubishi (Electric System) Service.) Refer to the following section for the lives of the battery, liquid crystal screen and backlight.
3.2 Performance Specifications
WARNING Connect the battery correctly.
Do not discharge, disassemble, heat, short, solder or throw the battery into the fire. These may cause the buttery to burst or fire.
Do not touch the terminals while the power is on. Doing so can cause an electric shock.
Before starting cleaning or retightening the terminal screws, always switch off the external power supplies used in the system in all phases. Cleaning or retightening the terminal screws while the power is on may cause an electric shock.
Make sure to shut off all phases of the GOT power externally (When the GOT is connected by the bus connection, also externally shut off all phases of the PLC CPU power.), and remove the GOT from the control panel. Then, replace the cold cathode tube backlight. Not switching off the power in all phases may cause an electric shock. Not removing the unit from the control panel can cause injury due to a drop.
CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the unit.
Doing so can cause a failure, malfunction or fire. Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the GOT directly.
Doing so can cause a unit malfunction failure. The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped.
Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling, motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.
When unplugging the cable connected to GOT, do not hold and pull the cable portion. Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.
Before insert/remove the connection cable, power off the GOT. Not doing so can cause a failure or malfunction.
When replacing the cold cathode tube backlight, wear gloves. Otherwise, it may cause you to be injured.
Replace the cold cathode tube backlight more than 5 minutes later after shutting off the GOT power. Failure to do so may cause a burn due to the heat of the cold cathode tube backlight.
Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted on the unit. Doing so can cause the battery to be damaged due to the drop or the impact, making the battery liquid to leak in the battery. Do not use but dispose the battery that is dropped or given an impact.
Before touching the unit, be sure to touch grounded metal or similar objects to discharge the static electricity from human body. Not doing so can cause a failure or malfunction of the unit.
When disposing of the product, handle it as industrial waste.
9 - 1
9.1 Daily Inspection
Daily inspection items
Refer to the following for the model names of the protection sheet or the replacement procedure. 8.3.2 Protective sheet
9.2 Periodic Inspection
Yearly or half-yearly inspection items The following inspection should also be performed when equipment has been moved or modified or the wiring changed.
No. Inspection Item Inspection Method Criterion Action
1 GOT mounting status Check for loose mounting screws.
Securely mounted Retighten screws within the specified torque range.
2 Connection status
Loose terminal screws Retighten screws with screwdriver
Not loose Retighten terminal screws
Proximate solderless terminals
Visual check Proper intervals Correct
Loose connectors Visual check Not loose Retighten connector fixing screws
3 Usage status
Dirt on protection sheet Visual check Not outstanding Replace with new one
Foreign material attachment Visual check No foreign matter sticking
Remove clean
No. Inspection Item Inspection Method Criterion Action
1 Surrounding environment
Ambient temperature Make measurement with
thermometer or hygrometer Measure corrosive gas
Display section 0 to 40C
For use in control panel, temperature inside control panel is ambient temperature
Other portions 0 to 55C
Ambient humidity
10 to 90%RH
Atmosphere No corrosive gas
2
GOT with 100-240V AC power
Power supply voltage check
100 to 240VAC Measure voltage across terminals.
85 to 242VAC Change supply power
GOT with 24VDC power
Input polarity of 24VDC power
24VDC Measure voltage across terminals.
Left : - Right : +
Change wiring
3 Mounting status
Looseness Move module Should be mounted firmly Retighten screws
Dirt, foreign matter
Visual check No dirt, foreign matter sticking Remove, clean
4 Connection status
Loose terminal screws
Retighten screws with screwdriver
Not loose Retighten terminal screws
Proximate solderless terminals
Visual check Proper intervals Correct
Loose connectors
Visual check Not loose Retighten connector fixing screws
5 Battery
Check [GOT internal battery voltage status] in [Time setting] of the
Utility. ( (Basic
Utility) 2.1.1 Time setting)
No alarm appears
Replace with new battery when the current battery has reached the specified life span, even if battery voltage low is not displayed.
9 - 2 9.1 Daily Inspection
9
M A
IN TE
N A
N C
E A
N D
IN
SP EC
TI O
N
10
TR O
U BL
ES H
O O
TI N
G AP
PE N
D IC
ES
9.3 Cleaning Method Use GOT always in a clean condition. To clean the GOT, wipe the dirty part with a soft cloth using neutral detergent or ethanol.
POINT
Precautions for screen cleaning Do not use solvents such as acetone, benzene, toluene, and alcohol (except ethanol). Solvents may deform the protective sheet, dissolve the surface, or peel the paint on the surface. In addition, do not use spray solvents. Doing so may cause an electrical failure of the GOT and peripheral devices.
Clean
9.3 Cleaning Method 9 - 3
9.4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement
Low battery voltage detection and replacement The battery is used for backing up the present time or the maintenance time notification data. It is recommended that you replace battery periodically. Refer to the following for the replacement procedure.
8.3.2 Battery
The battery voltage low detection can be confirmed by the utility and system alarm.
Refer to the following for details of the battery status display by the utility.
(Basic Utility) 2.1.1 Time setting
By using system alarm, the message that notifies the battery voltage has decreased can be displayed at the battery voltage low on the screen of the GOT. To display the following message on system alarm, set [Battery alarm display] to "ON".
(Basic Utility) 2.2.1 Display setting functions
Refer to the following for details of the system alarm display.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) (11. ALARM)
GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (8. ALARM)
POINT
Battery replacement timing When detecting voltage low, replace the battery immediately. Data can be saved for 14 days after the battery voltage low detection and cannot be saved after that.
3.4 Battery Specifications
System alarm
500 Warning! Built-in battery voltage is low.
9 - 4 9.4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement
9
M A
IN TE
N A
N C
E A
N D
IN
SP EC
TI O
N
10
TR O
U BL
ES H
O O
TI N
G AP
PE N
D IC
ES
Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built-in Batteries in EU Member States This section describes the precautions for disposing of waste batteries in EU member states and exporting batteries and/or devices with built-in batteries to EU member states.
(1) Disposal precautions In EU member states, there is a separate collection system for waste batteries. Dispose of batteries properly at the local community waste collection/recycling center. The following symbol is printed on the batteries and packaging of batteries and devices with built-in batteries used for Mitsubishi Electric Graphic Operation Terminal (GOT).
Symbol
POINT
This symbol is for EU member states only. The symbol is specified in the new EU Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) Article 20 "Information for end-users" and Annex II.
The symbol indicates that batteries need to be disposed of separately from other wastes.
(2) Exportation precautions The new EU Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) requires the follwoing when marketing or exporting batteries and/or devices with built-in batteries to EU member states. To print the symbol on batteries, devices, or their packaging To explain the symbol in the manuals of the products
(a) Labelling To market or export batteries and/or devices with built-in batteries, which have no symbol, to EU member states on September 26, 2008 or later, print the symbol shown in (1) on the GOT or their packaging.
(b) Explaining the symbol in the manuals To export devices incorporating Mitsubishi Electric Graphic Operation Terminal to EU member states on September 26, 2008 or later, provide the latest manuals that include the explanation of the symbol. If no Mitsubishi Electric manuals or any old manuals without the explanation of the symbol are provided, separately attach an explanatory note regarding the symbol to each manual of the devices.
HINT The requirements apply to batteries and/or devices with built-in batteries manufactured before the enforcement date of the new EU Battery Directive(2006/66/EC).
9.4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement 9 - 5
9.5 Backlight Shutoff Detection and Replacement The backlight is built into GOT for the liquid crystal display. When GOT detects backlight shutoff, the POWER LED blinks green/orange alternately. The LED backlight requires the LCD replacement. Contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd. The cold cathode tube backlight lowers its intensity with the duration of use. When backlight shutoff is detected or the display becomes unclear, replace the backlight. When replace the backlight, refer to "9.6 Backlight Replacement".
(1) Life of backlight The usable duration of backlight can be extended by setting to [Screen saving backlight off] in the utility of GOT (GOT set up). Refer to the following for details.
(Basic Utility) 2. DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS (GOT SET UP)
(2) Replacement time of backlight The backlight replacement time can be set by the utility of GOT (Maintenance timing setting) with reference to the life of backlight. Refer to the following for details.
(Basic Utility) 2.4.1 Maintenance time setting
Moreover, when system alarm is used, the message that notifies of the backlight replacement time can be displayed on the GOT screen.
Refer to the following for the system alarm display.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) (11. ALARM)
GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (8. ALARM)
POINT
Precautions for the backlight shutoff status In the backlight shutoff status, the touch key operates. Early replacement of backlight is recommended.
System alarm
502 Warning! Backlight needs replacement soon.
9 - 6 9.5 Backlight Shutoff Detection and Replacement
9
M A
IN TE
N A
N C
E A
N D
IN
SP EC
TI O
N
10
TR O
U BL
ES H
O O
TI N
G AP
PE N
D IC
ES
9.6 Backlight Replacement This section explains the backlight replacing methods.
9.6.1 Applicable backlight
The following backlights are applicable for GT16 The following models use LED backlights. Therefore, no backlight replacement is required. GT1655-V Other GT16 models with function version H or later
For how to check the function version, refer to the following.
. Appendix2 Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards
*1 Function version C or earlier *2 Function version D to G *3 Function version G or later
9.6.2 Replacement procedure of backlight
For GT16-90XLTT
1. Turn off the GOT.
2. Disconnect the power supply cable and communication cable. Remove the GOT from the control panel.
3. Remove the extension unit cover on the right side of the GOT. When extension units, including bus connection units, are mounted on the GOT, remove the units.
4. Remove eight fixing screws on the GOT rear face with a screwdriver.
Model name Description Target GOT
GT16-90XLTT For 15" high intensity, wide angle view TFT (XGA) GT1695M-X*3
GT16-80SLTT For 12.1" high intensity, wide angle view TFT (SVGA) GT1685M-S*3
GT16-70SLTT For 10.4" high intensity, wide angle view TFT (SVGA) GT1675M-S*3
GT16-70VLTT For 10.4" high intensity, wide angle view TFT (VGA) GT1675M-V*1
GT16-70VLTTA For 10.4" high intensity, wide angle view TFT (VGA) GT1675M-V*2
GT16-70VLTN For 10.4" TFT (VGA) GT1675-VN*3, GT1672-VN*3
GT16-60SLTT For 8.4" high intensity, wide angle view TFT (SVGA) GT1665M-S*3
GT16-60VLTT For 8.4" high intensity, wide angle view TFT (VGA) GT1665M-V*3
GT16-60VLTN For 8.4" TFT (VGA) GT1662-VN*3
Top
Bottom
A
9.6 Backlight Replacement 9 - 7
5. The model and the production year and month are printed on the back of a backlight. H01 or H02 is printed after the model. H01 indicates the upper backlight, and H02 indicates the lower backlight
6. Remove the cable connectors of the upper backlight (H01) and the cable connectors of the lower backlight (H02) from the GOT connectors.
7. Disconnect the cable connector of the upper (H01) backlight and the cable connector of the lower (H02) backlight from the GOT side connectors. (Expanded figure of part A in step 4)
8. Pull out the upper backlight from the backlight replacement hole on the upper part of the GOT. Pull out the lower backlight from the backlight replacement hole on the lower part of the GOT.
9. When pulling out the backlight with pushing it toward the center of the GOT, the projection of the rubber holder is unfixed and the backlight can be easily pulled out. (Expanded figure of part B in step 7)
10.Install a new backlight in the reverse procedure of removal. When inserting a new backlight into the backlight replacement hole of the GOT, make sure not to damage the sheaths of the cables. Insert the backlight until the projection of the rubber holder is fixed. Assemble the case in the reverse procedure of disassembly. (Tighten the fixing screws on the GOT rear face with a torque of 0.36 to 0.48Nm). When installing the case, make sure that the cables are not stuck between the case and the GOT.
GT16-9 0XLTT H
02 0 806
H02
H01
Top
Bottom
H01
Top
H02
B
Bottom
Hole for backlight replacement
A jut of the rubber holder
9 - 8 9.6 Backlight Replacement
9
M A
IN TE
N A
N C
E A
N D
IN
SP EC
TI O
N
10
TR O
U BL
ES H
O O
TI N
G AP
PE N
D IC
ES
For GT16-80SLTT, GT16-70SLTT and GT16-70VLTT
1. Turn off the GOT.
2. Disconnect the power supply cable and the communication cable. Remove the GOT from the control panel.
3. Remove the right extension unit cover of the GOT. Remove an extension unit, including a bus connection unit, if it is mounted.
4. Remove eight fixing screws on the GOT rear face with a screwdriver.
5. Remove the cable connector of the backlight from the connector of the GOT board. (Expanded figure of part A in step 4)
When replacing the GT16-70SLTT/VLTT, remove the cables from the cable holder. (When replacing the GT16-70SLTT/VLTT)
Top
Bottom
A
Top
Cable holder
9.6 Backlight Replacement 9 - 9
6. Push the backlight fixing latch (black) to the front face to pull out the backlight. Pull out the backlight so that the backlight does not hit the packing. (When replacing GT16-80SLTT)
(When replacing GT16-70SLTT/VLTT)
7. Install a new backlight in the reverse procedure of removal. When inserting a new backlight into the backlight replacement hole of the GOT, make sure not to damage the sheaths of the cables. Insert the backlight until it is fixed by the latch (black). Assemble the case in the reverse procedure of disassembly. (Tighten the fixing screws on the GOT rear face with a torque of 0.36 to 0.48 Nm). When installing the case, make sure that the cables are not stuck between the case and the GOT.
The latch is on the right side of the backlight. (Edge-on view figure of the part A in step 4)
Push the latch to the front face side with the finger. (If the latch cannot be reached, use a screw driver etc.)
Latch
Cable
Fluorescent tube Packing
Latch
Fluorescent tubePacking
9 - 10 9.6 Backlight Replacement
9
M A
IN TE
N A
N C
E A
N D
IN
SP EC
TI O
N
10
TR O
U BL
ES H
O O
TI N
G AP
PE N
D IC
ES
For GT16-70VLTTA The backlight replacement procedure differs according to the hardware version and the manufacture year and month of the GOT.
Appendix2 Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards
(1) GT1675M-VTBA with hardware version A (Manufacture year and month: January 2012) or earlier, and GT1675M-VTBD with hardware version B (Manufacture year and month: January 2012) or earlier
1. Turn off the GOT.
2. Disconnect the power supply cable and the communication cable. Remove the GOT from the control panel.
3. Remove the right extension unit cover of the GOT. Remove an extension unit, including a bus connection unit, if it is mounted.
4. Remove eight fixing screws on the GOT rear face with a screwdriver.
5. Remove the backlight cables and the relay cables from the GOT board connector. Since the relay connector adheres inside the GOT, detach the connector and perform the removal.(Expanded figure of part A in step 4)
Model name GOT hardware version (Manufacture year and month) Reference
GT1675M-VTBA A (January 2012) or earlier (1)
B (February 2012) or later (2)
GT1675M-VTBD B (January 2012) or earlier (1)
C (February 2012) or later (2)
Top
Bottom
A
Top
9.6 Backlight Replacement 9 - 11
6. Remove the backlight cables from the cable holder A by pulling the backlight cables one by one in the arrow I direction and then in the arrow II direction.
7. Pull out the backlight so that the backlight does not hit the packing.
8. Install a new backlight so that its top plate is inserted between the metal parts of the backlight replacement hole. When inserting a new backlight into the backlight replacement hole of the GOT, make sure not to damage the sheaths of the cables. Insert the backlight all the way in.
9. Connect the backlight cable connector to the GOT board connector. Do not put the cables of the backlight back to the cable holder A.Assemble the case in the reverse procedure of disassembly. (Tighten the fixing screws on the GOT rear face with a torque of 0.36 to 0.48 Nm). When installing the case, make sure that the cables are not stuck between the case and the GOT.
Cable holder A
Fluorescent tube
Packing
Insert the top plate of the backlight here.
Backlight top plate
Top
Cable holder A
(Not used)
9 - 12 9.6 Backlight Replacement
9
M A
IN TE
N A
N C
E A
N D
IN
SP EC
TI O
N
10
TR O
U BL
ES H
O O
TI N
G AP
PE N
D IC
ES
(2) GT1675M-VTBA with hardware version B (Manufacture year and month: February 2012) or later, and GT1675M-VTBD with hardware version C (Manufacture year and month: February 2012) or later
1. Turn off the GOT.
2. Disconnect the power supply cable and the communication cable. Remove the GOT from the control panel.
3. Remove the right extension unit cover of the GOT. Remove an extension unit, including a bus connection unit, if it is mounted.
4. Remove eight fixing screws on the GOT rear face with a screwdriver.
5. Remove the backlight cables from the GOT board connector.(Expanded figure of part A in step 4)
6. Remove the backlight cables one by one from the cable holder B.
7. Pull out the backlight so that the backlight does not hit the packing.
Top
Bottom
A
Top
Cable holder B
Fluorescent tube
Packing
9.6 Backlight Replacement 9 - 13
8. Install a new backlight so that its top plate is inserted between the metal parts of the backlight replacement hole. When inserting a new backlight into the backlight replacement hole of the GOT, make sure not to damage the sheaths of the cables. Insert the backlight all the way in.
9. Connect the backlight cable connector to the GOT board connector. Secure the backlight cables with the cable holder B.Assemble the case in the reverse procedure of disassembly. (Tighten the fixing screws on the GOT rear face with a torque of 0.36 to 0.48 Nm). When installing the case, make sure that the cables are not stuck between the case and the GOT.
For GT16-70VLTN
1. Turn off the GOT.
2. Disconnect the power supply cable and the communication cable. Remove the GOT from the control panel.
3. Remove the right extension unit cover of the GOT. Remove an extension unit, including a bus connection unit, if it is mounted.
4. Remove eight fixing screws on the GOT rear face with a screwdriver.
Insert the top plate of the backlight here.
Backlight top plate
Cable holder B
(Used)
Top
Top
Bottom
A
9 - 14 9.6 Backlight Replacement
9
M A
IN TE
N A
N C
E A
N D
IN
SP EC
TI O
N
10
TR O
U BL
ES H
O O
TI N
G AP
PE N
D IC
ES
5. Remove the cable connector of the backlight from the connector of the GOT board. (Expanded figure of part A in step 4)
Remove the cables from the cable holder.
6. Push the backlight fixing latch (black) to the front face to pull out the backlight. Pull out the backlight so that the backlight does not hit the packing.
7. Install a new backlight in the reverse procedure of removal. When inserting a new backlight into the backlight replacement hole of the GOT, make sure not to damage the sheaths of the cables. Insert the backlight until it is fixed by the latch (black). Assemble the case in the reverse procedure of disassembly. (Tighten the fixing screws on the GOT rear face with a torque of 0.36 to 0.48 Nm). When installing the case, make sure that the cables are not stuck between the case and the GOT.
For GT16-60SLTT, GT16-60VLTT
1. Turn off the GOT.
2. Disconnect the power supply cable and the communication cable. Remove the GOT from the control panel.
3. Remove the right extension unit cover of the GOT. Remove an extension unit, including a bus connection unit, if it is mounted.
Top
Cable holder
Latch
Fluorescent tube Packing
Top
Bottom
9.6 Backlight Replacement 9 - 15
4. Remove seven fixing screws on the GOT rear face with a screwdriver.
5. Remove the case after passing the battery holder through the mounting hole. When removing, take care of not cutting the cable of the battery holder. (Expanded figure of part A in step 4)
6. Pull out the tray for storing the cable connector of backlight. (Expanded figure of part A in step 4)
7. Disconnect the cable connector of backlight from the GOT side connectors.
8. Press the backlight fixing latch (black) with your fingers, and pull out the backlight to the left. Pull out the backlight so that the backlight does not hit the packing.
9. Install a new backlight in the reverse procedure of removal. When inserting a new backlight into the backlight replacement hole of the GOT, make sure not to damage the sheaths of the cables. Insert the backlight until it is fixed by the latch (black). Pull the cable tight toward the right side of the tray. Insert the tray until it is fixed. (Refer to figure in step 6) Assemble the case in the reverse procedure of disassembly. (Tighten the fixing screws on the GOT rear face with a torque of 0.36 to 0.48 Nm). When installing the case, make sure that the cables are not stuck between the case and the GOT.
A
B
Top
Top
Latch
Packing
9 - 16 9.6 Backlight Replacement
9
M A
IN TE
N A
N C
E A
N D
IN
SP EC
TI O
N
10
TR O
U BL
ES H
O O
TI N
G AP
PE N
D IC
ES
For GT16-60VLTN
1. Turn off the GOT.
2. Disconnect the power supply cable and the communication cable. Remove the GOT from the control panel.
3. Remove the right extension unit cover of the GOT. Remove an extension unit, including a bus connection unit, if it is mounted.
4. Remove seven fixing screws on the GOT rear face with a screwdriver.
5. Remove the case after passing the battery holder through the mounting hole. When removing, take care of not cutting the cable of the battery holder. (Expanded figure of part A in step 4)
6. Pull out the tray for storing the cable connector of backlight. (Expanded figure of part A in step 4)
7. Disconnect the cable connector of backlight from the GOT side connectors.
Top
Bottom
A
B
Top
Top
9.6 Backlight Replacement 9 - 17
8. Press the backlight fixing latch (black) with your fingers, and pull out the backlight to the left. Pull out the backlight so that the backlight does not hit the packing.
9. Install a new backlight in the reverse procedure of removal. When inserting a new backlight into the backlight replacement hole of the GOT, make sure not to damage the sheaths of the cables. Insert the backlight until it is fixed by the latch (black). Pull the cable tight toward the right side of the tray. Insert the tray until it is fixed. (Refer to figure in step 6) Assemble the case in the reverse procedure of disassembly. (Tighten the fixing screws on the GOT rear face with a torque of 0.36 to 0.48 Nm). When installing the case, make sure that the cables are not stuck between the case and the GOT.
Packing Latch
9 - 18 9.6 Backlight Replacement
9
M AI
N TE
N AN
C E
AN D
IN
SP EC
TI O
N
10
TR O
UB LE
SH O
O TI
NG AP
PE N
D IC
ES
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter explains the GOT restoration sheet, troubleshooting in the bus connection, and the error message/system alarm list.
10.1 GOT Restoration Sheet
This section provides restoration methods for the case the GOT does not operate normally, which are listed in check sheets. The following explains how to use each sheet.
(1) When the GOT does not operate or malfunctions (GOT status check sheet) When the GOT does not operate or malfunctions, identify the cause of the malfunction etc. with GOT status check sheet and take corrective action. When the GOT is restored, see the status for a while.
(2) When the wiring status needs to be improved (GOT installation status check sheet) When the noise caused by the GOT wiring status is considered to have caused the malfunction, etc. based on the check result of (1) above, take corrective action for wiring using GOT installation status check sheet. When the GOT is restored, see the status for a while.
(3) When corrective action other than (1) and (2) above is required (System configuration check sheet) If malfunction etc. occurs even after checking with (1) and (2) above, please contact your local Mitsubishi (Electric System) Service after filling out System configuration check sheet with details about your system. When sending a troubled product, attach the GOT restoration sheets (GOT status check sheet, GOT installation status check sheet, System configuration check sheet) checked in this section. Please keep copies of the restoration sheets.
10.1 GOT Restoration Sheet 10 - 1
GOT status check sheet Check the GOT starting from (1) GOT status. Proceed as instructed by "Action".
(1) Status of the GOT
Phenomenon Cause/status Action
(a) Frequency when the GOT does not operate, an error occurs on the screen, etc.
Occurs always. Occurrence frequency: ( ) Example: Once a month
Proceed to (1)-(b).
Occurs sometimes.
(b) Checking of the displayed error code (system alarm)
Can be checked. Error code (system alarm): ( ) Example: 460 Communication unit error
Take the action for the error code (system alarm) or error message checked. If the status does not change after the action is taken, proceed to (1)-(c).
Cannot be checked. Proceed to (1)-(c).
(c) POWER LED
Lit in green The power is supplied normally. Proceed to (1)-(d).
Lit in orange
Screen saving is being performed. The read device of the system information may have been turned ON when the device was set, and the screen was switched to the forced screen saving status.
Check the setting of the read device. When no problem is found in the setting, proceed to (1)-(d).
Blinks in green/orange The backlight has run out. Replace the backlight. If the GOT is not restored, proceed to (1)- (d).
Not lit
The power is not supplied. Check if the power is supplied. If the GOT is not restored, proceed to (5) Troubled product investigation.
When the power is supplied, the GOT hardware may be faulty.
10 - 2 10.1 GOT Restoration Sheet
9
M AI
N TE
N AN
C E
AN D
IN
SP EC
TI O
N
10
TR O
UB LE
SH O
O TI
NG AP
PE N
D IC
ES
Phenomenon Cause/status Action
(d) Screen display
The screen is completely black.
The LCD or BootOS may be failty.
Perform the following in order. 1) Reinstalling BootOS 2) Reinstalling standard monitor OS If the GOT is not restored by 1) and 2), perform the following. 3) Reinstalling CoreOS and then standard monitor OS If the GOT is not restored by the above operations, proceed to (5) Troubled product investigation.
The screen is completely white.
The GOT hardware may be faulty. Proceed to (5) Troubled product investigation.
A line is displayed on the screen.
The GOT hardware may be faulty.
Example: A vertical line is displayed. Proceed to (5) Troubled product investigation.
Other faulty displays
The screen freezes. The screen display is not updated and any operation is not allowed.
Proceed to (1)-(e).
(e) Buzzer sound
Does not sound. Buzzer sound: ( ) Example: The rhythm as three beeps, one beep, and then two beeps is repeated.
Proceed to (2) Status of the GOT when it freezes.
Continues to beep randomly.
Continues to beep in a particular pattern.
Beeps continuously. The read device of the system information may have turned ON when the device was set, turning ON the Buzzer output signal.
Check the setting of the read device. When the Buzzer output signal has no error, proceed to (2) Status of the GOT when it freezes.
10.1 GOT Restoration Sheet 10 - 3
(2) Status of the GOT when it freezes (screen operation stopped)
(3) Status of the PLC CPU
Phenomenon Cause/status Action
(a) Switching to the utility
Enabled Error code (system alarm): ( ) Example: 460 Communication unit error
When the system alarm display function can be used, take the action for the error code (system alarm) displayed. If the action cannot be taken, proceed to (2)-(b).
Disabled The system alarm display function cannot be used.
Proceed to (2)-(c).
(b) Executing of I/O check from the GOT utility
Communication error
Display details: ( ) Example: A message indicating the cause may be a connection error was displayed.
Proceed to (2)-(c).
No error The hardware such as a communication interface has no error.
Proceed to (3) Status of the PLC CPU.
(c) Objects not displayed on the monitor screen
Found Details: ( ) Example: The numerical display object is not displayed.
Proceed to (3) Status of the PLC CPU.
Not found
Phenomenon Cause/status Action
(a) PLC failure
Occurs always.
An error such as CONTROL-BUS. ERROR or SP. UNIT LAY. ERROR may have occurred. Error code (system alarm): ( ) Example: 1204 CPU H/W fault
Proceed to the following.
10.2 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection
Occurs sometimes.
The PLC CPU may be influenced by noise or the hardware may be faulty. Occurrence frequency: ( ) Example: Once a month
Error code (system alarm): ( ) Example: 1204 CPU H/W fault
Proceed to (4) GOT restoration procedure.
Operates normally.
10 - 4 10.1 GOT Restoration Sheet
9
M AI
N TE
N AN
C E
AN D
IN
SP EC
TI O
N
10
TR O
UB LE
SH O
O TI
NG AP
PE N
D IC
ES
(4) GOT restoration procedure Follow the procedures below starting from (a) and in order to check if the GOT is restored. If the GOT is not restored, proceed to the next item.
*1 The GOT reset switch does not operate when the bus connection is used.
*2 When the bus connection is used, do not power the GOT ON again (OFF ON) while the power of the PLC is ON.
When powering the GOT ON again (OFF ON), power OFF the PLC before that. *3 By powering OFF the GOT, an error occurs in the control station when the MELSECNET/H connection is used or in the master
station when the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) is used.
(5) Troubled product investigation When malfunction of the GOT is not improved, please contact your local Mitsubishi (Electric System) Service. Depending on the problem details, we may ask you to return the troubled product to us. In that case, please attach the GOT status check sheet, GOT installation status check sheet, and the system configuration check sheet filled out with details of your system.
Check item Cause Action
(a) Press the GOT reset switch. *1, 3
Restored Not restored (Proceed to (b).)
The GOT may have malfunctioned temporarily due to noise.
Take the action of (4)-(h).
(b) Power the GOT ON/OFF. *2, 3
Restored Not restored (Proceed to (c).)
(c) Reset or power ON/OFF the PLC CPU.
Restored Not restored (Proceed to (d).)
(d) Power the GOT and PLC CPU ON/ OFF simultaneously.
Restored Not restored (Proceed to (e).)
(e) Connect the cable again.
Restored Not restored (Proceed to (f).)
The cable connection may be faulty. Securely connect the cable. If an error occurs again, proceed to (5) Troubled product investigation.
(f) Reinstall the project data.
Restored Not restored (Proceed to (g).)
Data may have been destroyed by an action such as powering the GOT OFF during the installation of project data or OS.
Do not power the GOT OFF while transferring data. If an error occurs again, proceed to (5) Troubled product investigation.
(g) Reinstall the OS.
Restored Not restored (Proceed to (h).)
(h) Take the action described in the "Action" column.
Restored Not restored (Proceed to (i).)
The GOT may have malfunctioned temporarily due to noise.
Take the action with referring to GOT installation status check sheet.
(i) Replace the unit/module.
Restored Not restored The hardware of the unit/module may be faulty.
Install the unit/module with which the GOT malfunctioned again to see if the unit/module caused the malfunction. After checking, proceed to (5) Troubled product investigation.
The GOT is not restored even by performing (a) to (i).
Proceed to (5) Troubled product investigation.
10.1 GOT Restoration Sheet 10 - 5
GOT installation status check sheet Check the current installation status of the GOT you are using against the GOT installation status described in the upper column of items (1) to (7). When the measure described in the lower column is needed, take the measure for the current status. When the measure is taken, check the result, "Effective" or "Ineffective".
(1) Panel inside wiring
(2) Panel outside wiring
Current status
The power line connected to the power or servo amplifier and the communication cable such as bus connection cable or network cable are mixed in the duct.
Mixed
Not mixed
Measure for the cables mixed
Wiring the power line and communication cable in the panel without mixing them in the duct can reduce the influence of noise.
Effective
Ineffective
Current status
The power line and communication cable are installed together.
Installed together
Not installed together
Measure for the cables installed together
Fig. A
Leading the power line and communication cable outside the panel at separate places can make the communication cable less influenced by noise from the power line. Installing the communication cable apart from the power line or using a separator (made of metal) in the duct as shown in Fig. B can make the communication cable less influenced by noise.
Effective
Ineffective
Fig. B
NFB
MC MC RA RA
NFB
MC MC RA RA
Power line
Communication cable
Communication cable Power line
Power line
Wiring duct
Separator
Power line
Signal line Communication
cable
100mm or more
10 - 6 10.1 GOT Restoration Sheet
9
M AI
N TE
N AN
C E
AN D
IN
SP EC
TI O
N
10
TR O
UB LE
SH O
O TI
NG AP
PE N
D IC
ES
(3) Wiring of GOT's FG cable and power line
(4) Surge measures
Entry area
Current status The FG cable and power line of the GOT are installed together.
Installed together
Not installed together
Measure for the cables installed together
Separating the FG cable and power line of the GOT in wiring reduces the influence of noise.
Effective
Ineffective
Current status
A surge suppressor is used for the wiring of the load such as MCCB, electromagnetic contactor, relay, solenoid valve, or induction motor.
(When a surge suppressor is used, fill out the entry area below with the surge suppressor model name and the name of the equipment for which the surge suppressor is used.)
Used
Not used
Measure for the equipment without a surge suppressor used
Attaching the surge suppressor on the cable close to the load can reduce the influence of surge on the GOT.
Effective
Ineffective
Model name of the surge suppressor Equipment name
GOT
LG FG
Power for the power equipment
GOT
Power for the power equipment
LG FG
AC
C L
R Output
PLC
AC
C L
R Output
PLC
The surge suppressor must be
attached close to the load
10.1 GOT Restoration Sheet 10 - 7
(5) Grounding status
Current status
The FG cables of the control equipment (such as PLC) and the power equipment (such as servo amplifier) are connected as shown by "a".
Connected
Not connected
Measure for the FG cables connected
Fig. A
Perform independent grounding at two places as shown in Fig. A. Independent grounding can reduce the influence of noise. If independent grounding is not allowed, be sure to perform shared grounding as shown in Fig. B.
Effective
Ineffective
Fig. B
GOTFG LG
Connection cable
Panel grounding Panel grounding
FG
FG
CN1BCN1A
CN3CN2 LG
a
PLCServo
GOT FG LG
Connection cable
Panel grounding
Grounding for power system
Grounding for power system
Terminal block Terminal block Panel grounding
FG
FG
CN1BCN1A
CN3CN2 LG
PLCServo
GOTFG LG
Connection cable
Panel grounding
Panel grounding
FG
FG
CN1BCN1A
CN3CN2 LG
PLCServo
10 - 8 10.1 GOT Restoration Sheet
9
M AI
N TE
N AN
C E
AN D
IN
SP EC
TI O
N
10
TR O
UB LE
SH O
O TI
NG AP
PE N
D IC
ES
(6) Grounding status of the panel on which the GOT is installed
Current status
A single ground cable is led from the panel having the control equipment such as PLC to the panel having the GOT.
Led
Not led
Measure for the ground cable led
Fig. A
Connecting the ground cable to the panel having the GOT as shown in Fig. A to reduce the potential difference may prevent the malfunction. When wiring as shown in Fig. A is difficult, perform wiring as shown in Fig. B.
Effective
Ineffective
Fig. B
Fig. C
Attaching the ferrite core (KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES CO.,LTD. RFC-H13 or equivalent product) to the ground cable connected to the panel having the GOT as shown in Fig. C reduces the influence of noise. When wiring as shown in Fig. C is difficult, perform wiring as shown in Fig. D.
Effective
Ineffective
Fig. D
Connection cable
GOT FG LG
Ground cable led from the panel having the control equipment
GOT
Ground to the panel.
Ground cable
Use a short and thick wire as possible.
FG LG
Connection cable
GOT
Ground to the panel.
Ground cable FG LG
Connection cable
GOT
Ground to the panel.
Ferrite coreGround cable
FG LG
Connection cable
Use a short and thick wire as possible.
GOT
Ground to the panel.
Ground cable FG LG
Connection cable
Ferrite core
10.1 GOT Restoration Sheet 10 - 9
(7) Power supply system
Current status
The power from the same system is used for the GOT, I/O equipment (such as relay), and power equipment (such as servo amplifier).
Used
Not used
Measure for the equipment for which the power from the same system is used
Connecting an isolation transformer as well as separating the wiring of the GOT power from that of the power of the I/O equipment and power equipment reduces the influence of noise.
Effective
Ineffective
Main power PLC power AC200V
I/O power
Main circuit power
I/O equipment
Power equipment
PLC
GOT
Main power PLC power
Isolation transformer
AC200V
I/O power
Main circuit power
I/O equipment
Power equipment
PLC
GOT
10 - 10 10.1 GOT Restoration Sheet
9
M AI
N TE
N AN
C E
AN D
IN
SP EC
TI O
N
10
TR O
UB LE
SH O
O TI
NG AP
PE N
D IC
ES
System configuration check sheet Fill in the brackets with the unit/module name.
(1) System configuration of the GOT
(a) GOT main unit [ ]
(b) Option function board Used [ ]
Not used
(c) Communication interface Communication unit
[ ]
GOT built-in interface
(d) Option unit Used [ ]
Not used
(e) Cable between the PLC and GOT [ ]
(f) Cable length [ m]
(g) If any other unit etc. is used, please describe it.
(2) System configuration of the PLC
(a) Power supply module [ ]
(b) CPU module [ ]
(c) Serial communication module/ computer link module
Used [ ]
Not used
(d) Network module Used [ ]
Not used
(e) Interrupt module Used [ ]
Not used
(f) Positioning module Used [ ]
Not used
(g) Number of extension stages [ stages]
(h) If any other module etc. is used, please describe it.
Entry area for recurrence (when the malfunction occurred after the action is taken)
(3) Describe the operation situation when freezing of the screen or faulty display of the GOT has reocurred.
10.1 GOT Restoration Sheet 10 - 11
10.2 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection
When connect GOT and PLC CPU with bus connection, and the cause is not clear in "10.3.2 List of error message/ system alarm", execute the following troubleshooting. Refer to the following for details concerning the bus connection.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2/GT Works2
10.2.1 Locating error positions
Explanation regarding the method of specifying the error part. (Please refer to User's Manual of used PLC CPU for details related to the PLC CPU error and special register.)
(1) How to locate error positions: (a) Use of peripheral devices
Using the peripheral devices such as GX Developer, check what type of the error occurs on the PLC CPU and, based on the error message on the PLC CPU, check each module and cable for installation and earthing statuses.
(b) Error timing Check the timing of errors.
(c) Locating the module where an error occurs: Based on the PLC CPU error codes and special resister information, locate a specific module where an error occurs.
By the method stated above, correct the sequence program or replace the faulty module with a new one, and check whether the error occurs. If the error continues to occur, it may have another cause. Referring to "10.2.2 Further locating error positions", locate the error position further.
1) An error occurs when the power is turned on or immediately after the PLC is reset: The error may be detected by the initial processing of the PLC CPU. In this case, because the faulty module may not be identified, use only an END instruction for the sequence program and remove the modules one by one until the error does not occur. When the error is eliminated after a specific module has been removed, the module may be causing the error.
2) An error occurs after a specific operation or several seconds: The error may occur in the sequence program. Check the error step where the error may occur and the sequence program in that step. The sequence program can be diagnosed throughout by merely using an END instruction for the sequence program.
3) An error occurs when a specific device operates: The mis-operation may be caused by noise. Check that any signal line such as bus cable is not laid out too close to the operating device. If the line is too close to the device, separate the line 100 mm or more from the device.
10 - 12 10.2 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection
9
M AI
N TE
N AN
C E
AN D
IN
SP EC
TI O
N
10
TR O
UB LE
SH O
O TI
NG AP
PE N
D IC
ES
10.2.2 Further locating error positions
If the function of the PLC cannot be recovered even when the module on which an error occurs is replaced with a new one, the error may be caused by the effect from another module. Disconnect the extension cables and bus connection cables in order from the modules starting from the module located furthest from the operating position in the system, and check for the status of occurrence of the error each time the cables are disconnected until the error does not occur. The module or extension cables/bus-connection cables disconnected immediately before the error does not occur are considered to cause the error. Examples of the ways of further locating error positions are shown below. (When use the extension base unit QnASCPU)
Repeat the examples 1 and 2 above to locate error positions.
POINT
Notes on narrowing the error part range
The checks stated above are effective to locate a noise invading route when the mis-operation is caused by noise.
1. When disconnecting the extension base units in order, use only an ENDinstruction for the sequence program, and any error resulting from the sequence program will not occur, and the status of occurrence of errors will be obtained easily.
2. When the frequency of occurrence of an error is low, check the error by taking a rather long time with the modules disconnected.
Turn off the power of the GOT.
Disconnect the bus-connection cable
(IN side) from the final stage GOT.
If an error does not occur, the final
stage GOT may be faulty.
Example 1: Example 2:
Turn off the power of the PLC.
Turn on the power of the PLC.
Turn on the power of the GOT.
Turn off the power of the GOT.
Disconnect the bus-connection cable
(OUT side) from the GOT located one
stage before the final stage.
If an error does not occur, the final
stage GOT and the bus-connection
cable before the final stage may be
faulty.
Turn off the power of the PLC.
Turn on the power of the PLC.
Turn on the power of the GOT.
10.2 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection 10 - 13
10.2.3 Specific example of troubleshooting
Taking the following system as an example, troubleshooting is shown when PLC CPU error occurred. (When QnASCPU and the extension base unit are used)
PLC
(main base unit) GOT 1) GOT 2)
PLC
(extension base unit) Bus connection
cable
Bus connection
cable
Extension cable
Start
Check the error code/step appearing on the PLC CPU.
(Obtain the status of the error and the location where the error occurs.)
The error occurs further (not on the GOT 2) (bus connection unit)).
The SP. UNIT DOWN message appears on PLC CPU.
Turn off the power of the GOT.
Turn off the power of the PLC.
Replace the faulty PLC CPU with a new one.
The error occurs further (not on PLC CPU).
Turn off the power of the GOT.
Turn off the power of the PLC.
Disconnect the bus-connection cable from the GOT 2) at IN side
(to further locate the error positions).
Turn on the power of the PLC.
Turn on the power of the GOT.
Turn off the power of the GOT.
Turn off the power of the PLC.
Turn on the power of the PLC.
Turn on the power of the GOT.
Disconnect the bus-connection cable from the GOT 1) at OUT side
(to further locate the error positions).
Turn on the power of the PLC.
Turn on the power of the GOT.
The error will not occur.
The bus-connection cable connecting the GOT 1) to the GOT 2) is judged faulty.
Replace the faulty bus-connection cable with a new one.
End
10 - 14 10.2 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection
9
M AI
N TE
N AN
C E
AN D
IN
SP EC
TI O
N
10
TR O
UB LE
SH O
O TI
NG AP
PE N
D IC
ES
10.3 Error Message and System Alarm
This chapter describes the error message and system alarm displayed in the GOT. As the error code and error message displaying functions when an error occurs at the GOT, controller or network, there are two kinds: system alarm and advanced system alarm. For details of the system alarm and advanced system alarm, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)
GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual
HINT
Error code and channel No. Error codes can also be confirmed in the error code storage area of the system information function. The channel No. where an error is occurring can be confirmed with the GOT special register (GS262 to 264).
For details of the system information and GOT special register, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)
GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual
10.3.1 Error contents display
This section describes the example for displaying error code and error message on GOT.
Popup-displaying the error code and error message (Advanced alarm popup display (System alarm)) If an error occurs, the error code and error message can be popup-displayed on the front of the monitor screen. As alarms are popup-displayed regardless of the screen type, the error occurred will not be overlooked.
Displaying error code and error message in a list (Advanced system alarm display) If error has occurred, error code and error message can be displayed on the list set with the screen. Multiple errors can be displayed, or the history of display can be recorded.
A 1254
348B
A 1254
348B
04/6/1 13:20 Power module
Pop up generated alarms
regardless of the screen.
04/6/1 8:05 Fuse error
Occurred Message Restore Check
04/6/1 10:25 Temp. error
Create a screen to display alarms, and confirm
the details of the alarms and take measures.
11:25 10:45
10.3 Error Message and System Alarm 10 - 15
Checking error messages with the utility (Utility) The error code and error message can be checked with the system alarm display of the utility when the object is not set.
(Basic Utility) 5.1.2 System alarm
Error code and reference manual
*1 For details of GOT special registers (GS262 to 264), refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (App.2.1 GOT internal devices)
GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (2.9.1 GOT internal devices)
*2 The assigned error code for FXCPU is 100 to 109, which displays the status of M8060 to M8069. (Example) When the error code (100) error occurs, correct the error according to the M8060 description.
*3 The error code displayed on GOT is calculated by changing the error code (Hexadecimal) displayed on the servo amplifier to the decimal number and adding 20000 to it.
When referring to the manual of servo amplifier by the error code displayed as a GOT system alarm, subtract 20000 from the GOT error code and change its lower three digits to the hexadecimal number.
(Example: When GOT system alarm is 20144, the error code of servo amplifier becomes 90H.) *4 Channel No. will not be stored depending on the error code.
For channel No. storage availability for each error code, refer to the following.
10.3.2 List of error message/system alarm
*5 An alarmed drive cannot be confirmed in the system alarm regarding file access; however, it can be specified by confirming the file access error signal (b7 to 10) of system signal 2-2.
*6 The GOT displays the error code corresponding to an error occurring in the multiple CPU system. Check the error details with MT Developer or MT Works2. For error handling, refer to the manual of the motion controller.
*7 The GOT displays the error code corresponding to an error occurring in the multiple CPU system.
Error source Error code Description Channel No.
storage
destination *1 Reference
Controller
0 to 99 (Value of D9008)
Error code of CPU (for ACPU)
GS263
User's manual of the ACPU connected with GOT
100 to 299
Error code of the following controllers
FXCPU*2
Third party PLC Temperature controller (OMRON temperature controller only)
User's manual of the controller connected with the GOT Deal with errors according to the error messages.
GOT*5
300 to 399 Error code of the GOT main unit function
GS262*4 10.3.2 List of error message/ system alarm
400 to 499 Error code of the GOT communication function
500 to 699 Error code of the GOT main unit function
Network 800 to 999 Error code of network GS264
CPU 1000 to 10000 (Value of SD0)
Error code of CPU (for QCPU, LCPU, QnACPU)
GS263
User's manual of the QCPU, LCPU and QnACPU connected with GOT
Motion controller
10001 to 10999 Error code of motion controller (Q173D(S)CPU/Q172D(S)CPU/ Q170M(S)CPU)
*6
CNC C70 11000 to 11999 Error code of CNC (Q173NCCPU)
*7
Robot controller
12000 to 12999 Error code of robot controller *8
Servo
amplifier*3 20016 to 20237 Error code of servo amplifier User's manual of the servo amplifier connected to GOT
10 - 16 10.3 Error Message and System Alarm
9
M AI
N TE
N AN
C E
AN D
IN
SP EC
TI O
N
10
TR O
UB LE
SH O
O TI
NG AP
PE N
D IC
ES
Check the error details with the CNC monitor. For error handling, refer to the manual of the CNC.
*8 The GOT displays the error code corresponding to an error occurring in a robot controller in the multiple CPU system or a stand- alone robot controller. Check the error details with RT ToolBox2. For error handling, refer to the manual of the robot controller.
10.3 Error Message and System Alarm 10 - 17
10.3.2 List of error message/system alarm
The system alarm detected with GOT is shown below.
Error code
Error message Action Channel No.
storage
303 Set monitor points too large. Decrease setting points.
Decrease the number of objects from the displayed screen. For the number of maximum objects for 1 screen, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)
GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manuall
304 Set trigger points too large. Decrease setting points.
The number of objects using Sampling/Cycle during ON/Cycle during OFF exceeds 100. Decrease the number of objects.
306 No project data. Download screen data.
The project data is not downloaded or the screen data is not sufficient. Download the project data or screen data.
307 Monitor device not set The monitor device of the object is not set. Set the monitor device of the object.
308 No comment data. Download comment.
The comment file does not exist. Create the comment file and download to GOT.
309 Device reading error. Correct device.
The error occurred when reading a continuous device. Correct the device.
310 Project data does not exist or out of range.
Specified base screen / window screen does not exist in the project data. Specified base screen / window screen is out of the permissible area. Specify the existing base screen / window screen.
311 No. of alarm has exceeded upper limit. Delete restored alarm.
The number of alarm histories that can be observed by the alarm history display function has exceeded the maximum points. Delete the restored history to decrease the number of alarm histories.
312 No. of sampling has exceeded upper limit. Delete collected data.
The collection frequency exceeded the upper limit when "Store Memory" and "Accumulate/Average" were set in the scatter graph. Approve "Clear trigger" setup in the scatter graph. Set the "Operation at frequency over time" to "Initialize and Continue" in scatter graph.
315 Device writing error. Correct device.
Error occurred while writing in the device. Correct the device.
316 Cannot display or input operation value. Review expression.
In indirect specification of comment/parts number, the data operation result exceeded the range in which device type can be expressed. Review the data operational expression, in order not exceeding the range in which the device type can be expressed.
317 Too high frequency of data collection. Review conditions.
Data of an object, to which [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied] is set, are collected too frequently, or the number of objects has exceeded the number of objects collectable simultaneously. Set a longer cycle for trigger occurrence to each object. Make the settings so that 257 or more display triggers of objects, to
which [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied] is set, do not occur simultaneously.
320 Specified object does not exist or out of range.
The part file does not exist. Create the part file and download to GOT.
322 Dedicated device is out of range. Confirm device range.
The monitored device No. is out of the permissible area of the targeted PLC CPU. Set the device within the range that can be monitored by the monitored PLC CPU and parameter settings.
10 - 18 10.3 Error Message and System Alarm
9
M AI
N TE
N AN
C E
AN D
IN
SP EC
TI O
N
10
TR O
UB LE
SH O
O TI
NG AP
PE N
D IC
ES
330 Insufficient memory media capacity. Confirm M-card capacity.
Available memory of the CF card is insufficient.Confirm the available memory of the CF card. The available memory can be confirmed by system information screen, which is described in GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) or GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual.
331 Memory card not installed or M- CARD switched OFF
The CF card is not installed or in the drive access switch is OFF in drive. Install the CF card in the specified drive. Turn ON the access switch.
332 Memory media is not formatted. CF card is not formatted or formatted incorrectly. Format the CF card.
333 Unable to overwrite. Memory card is write-protected.
CF card is write-protected. Cancel the write-protection of CF card.
334 Memory media error. Replace memory media.
CF card is faulty. Replace the CF card.
337 File output failed. Confirm output file path.
Either of the following folder or file with the name same as the file to be created exists in the storage destination CF card or USB memory. Folder storing data Write-protect file
Delete the above folder or file, or change the name of the file to be created.
338 Modem is not connected correctly or the power is not turned on.
There is no response to the initializing command because the modem is not connected correctly or the power is not turned on. Confirm the modem connection. Turn on the power of the modem.
339 Failed to initialize the modem. Check initialization command.
An error is returned from the modem because the initializing command is invalid. Confirm the initializing command of the modem.
340 Printer error or power failure Printer is faulty or the printer power supply has not been turned on. Confirm the printer. Turn on the power supply of the printer.
341 Printer error Printer is faulty or the printer power supply has not been turned on. Confirm the printer. Turn on the power supply of the printer.
342 External power is not supplied to external I/O unit
Error occurred at the external I/O interface module. If an external power supply (24VDC) is not supplied, supply the
external power supply. If an external power supply is supplied, replace the external I/O
interface module.
343 External I/O unit installation error. Check if firmly installed.
The external I/O interface module is not installed correctly. Install the external I/O interface module correctly.
345 BCD/BIN conversion error Correct data
Any value that cannot be converted to a BCD/BIN value is being displayed/input. Change the device data to be displayed to the BCD value. Correct the input value to the 4 digits integer.
351 Recipe file error. Confirm content of recipe file.
The contents of the recipe file are not normal. Confirm the contents of the recipe files in the CF card or USB memory. Reboot the GOT after deleting the recipe file in the CF card or USB
memory (format).
352 Recipe file make error. Reboot GOT after inserting memory card.
Failed to generate recipe file. Reboot the GOT after installing the CF card or USB memory.
Error code
Error message Action Channel No.
storage
10.3 Error Message and System Alarm 10 - 19
353 Unable to write Recipe file. Confirm memory card is inserted.
Failed to write in the recipe file. Confirm the write-protection of the CF card or USB memory. Confirm the contents of the CF card or USB memory. Do not pull out the CF card or USB memory while recipe is operating.
354 Recipe file write error Error occurred while writing in the recipe file. Do not unplug the CF card or USB memory while recipe is operating.
355 Recipe file read error
Error occurred while writing in the recipe file. Do not unplug the CF card or USB memory while recipe is operating. Confirm the contents (device value) of the recipe file in the CF card or
USB memory.
356 File system error occurred in PLC. Confirm file register.
Error occurred in the specified file register when executing the recipe function by specifying the file register name. Execute the recipe function again after confirming the file register
name. Execute the recipe function again after formatting the PC memory in
the specified PLC CPU drive with GX Developer.
357 Error in specified PLC drive Confirm PLC drive
When executing the recipe function specifying the file register name, error occurred in PLC CPU drive. Execute the recipe function again after confirming the specified PLC
CPU drive. Execute the recipe function again after formatting the PC memory in
the specified PLC CPU drive with GX Developer.
358 PLC file access failure. Confirm PLC drive.
When the recipe function is executed specifying the file register name, PLC CPU file register could not be accessed. Execute the recipe function again after confirming the specified PLC
CPU drive / file register name. (When you specify drive 0, execute the recipe function again after changing to other drives.)
Confirm whether the CF card or USB memory are write-protected, and execute the recipe function again.
Confirm that the security key is not set on the specified CPU, and execute the recipe function again.
359 Processing from another peripheral device. Execute it after.
When the recipe function is executed specifying the file register name, other peripherals carry out the process to the file register. Wait until the processing of other peripherals end, and execute the recipe function again.
360 0 divisor division error. Confirm operation expression.
Zero division occurred by the data operational expression. Review the data operational expression so that the divisor should not become 0.
361 Specified device No. is out of range.
The entered file number is out of range. Check the entered file number, and enter a valid value (1 to 9999).
362 Invalid device value in time action setting
When controllers are controlled with the GOT's time action function, the set No. is our of range, or the set device values regarding the operation settings are out of range or invalid. Set valid values.
370 Upper and lower limit value error. Confirm value setting.
The setting of lower/upper limit value is [Upper limit Lower limit]. Correct the setting so as to be "Upper limit > Lower limit".
380 Insufficient USB drive capacity. Confirm the drive capacity.
Available memory of the USB memory is insufficient. Confirm the available memory of the USB memory, and increase the memory if it is low.
381 USB drive is not installed or in a removable state.
If the USB memory is not installed, install it. If the USB memory is ready to be removed, install it again.
Error code
Error message Action Channel No.
storage
10 - 20 10.3 Error Message and System Alarm
9
M AI
N TE
N AN
C E
AN D
IN
SP EC
TI O
N
10
TR O
UB LE
SH O
O TI
NG AP
PE N
D IC
ES
382 USB drive is not formatted. Memory card is not formatted or in a format not conformed by a GOT. Reformat the USB memory.
383 Unable to overwrite. USB drive is write-protected
USB memory is write-protected. Cancel the write-protection of USB memory.
384 USB drive error. Replace USB drive.
USB memory is faulty. Replace the USB memory.
402 Communication timeout. Confirm communication pathway or modules.
The time-out error occurred during communicating. Confirm the cable omission, the communication unit mounting status
and status of the PLC. Channel No. is not displayed in error code or error message in the case an error occurs when using the multi-channel function. Refer to the following manual to identify the channel No. in error.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT
Works3 and a controller used (1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring)
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT
Designer2/GT Works2 (Description of "Checking for normal monitoring" of each connection type)
This error may occur when the load of PLC CPU becomes heavier while accessing other stations. In such case, transfer the data of the other station to the host station PLC CPU and monitor them at the host.
Put COM instruction when the PLC scanning is long. Check if the version of the communication driver supports the
controller. For how to check the version of the communication driver, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual
(Fundamentals) 8. COMMUNICATION WITH GOT
403 SIO status error. Confirm communication pathway or modules.
Either of the overrun error, parity bit error or flaming error was generated when the RS-422 / RS-232 communication was received. Confirm the cable omission, the communication module mounting status, status of the PLC.and the transmission speed of the computer link. Channel No. is not displayed in error code or error message in the case an error occurs when using the multi-channel function. Refer to the following manual to identify the channel No. in error.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT
Works3 and a controller used (1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring)
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT
Designer2/GT Works2 (Description of "Checking for normal monitoring" of each connection type)
406 Specified station access is out of range. Confirm station no.
Station numbers other than master/local station are specified at the CC-Link connection (via G4).
A PLC CPU other than QCPU is accessed. Confirm the station number of the project data.
Error code
Error message Action Channel No.
storage
10.3 Error Message and System Alarm 10 - 21
407 Accessed other network. Change network setting.
When monitoring the same network as the GOT The GOT accesses the other networks with the MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 (PLC to PLC network), or CC-Link IE Controller Network connection. Confirm the network number of the project data so as not to access to other networks.
When monitoring other networks Reconfigure the [Routing Information Setting] of GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 or the [Routing parameters] of GX Developer.
When using GT15-75J71LP23-Z/GT15-75J71BR13-Z Other networks cannot be monitored. Confirm the network number of the project data so as not to access to other networks.
410 Cannot perform operation because of PLC run mode. stop the PLC.
The operation, which could not be performed during RUN of PLC CPU, was performed. Stop the PLC CPU.
411 Memory cassette is write- protected. Check the memory cassette.
The memory cassette installed in the PLC CPU is EPROM or E2PROM, and it is in a protected status. Confirm the memory cassette installed in PLC CPU.
412 Cannot read/write device protected by keyword. Remove keyword.
The key word is set in PLC CPU. Cancel the key word.
420 E71 specification is ASCII. [ASCII code] is selected in [Ethernet operations] of the PLC side setting. Select [Binary code].
421 E71 is set as read-only. Clear setting.
The Ethernet module on the PLC side is set in read-only. Set the Ethernet module on the PLC side to write-enabled.
422 Not communicating between CPU and E71. Confirm CPU error.
PLC CPU error. Communication between PLC CPU and the PLC side Ethernet module impossible. Confirm whether there is error in PLC CPU by GX Developer etc. (Confirm buffer memory)
423 Insufficient network table information. Add station no.
The station number set in the project data and the station number set in the switching station No. device do not exist in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer3 or GT Designer2. Add the station number set in the project data to the Ethernet setting
of GT Designer3 or GT Designer2. When using the station No. switching function, check the data of the
switching station No. device. When the station number specified in the switching station No. device is not set in the Ethernet setting, add the station number to the Ethernet setting. When the station number does not exist in the system, change the data of the switching station No. device. (Set the station number so that it becomes the same as the station number of the PLC side Ethernet module set in the parameter setting of GX Developer.)
Error code
Error message Action Channel No.
storage
10 - 22 10.3 Error Message and System Alarm
9
M AI
N TE
N AN
C E
AN D
IN
SP EC
TI O
N
10
TR O
UB LE
SH O
O TI
NG AP
PE N
D IC
ES
424 Same sta. on GOT & project data. Review communication parameter.
The station number set in the GOT's utility is the same as the station number set in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 (the station number of the PLC side Ethernet module) or in the project data. Check the following contents so that the multiple station numbers should not be the same. Check the GOT's station number in the GOT's utility. Check the station number set in the project data. Check the station number set in the Ethernet setting.
(Set the station number so that it becomes the same as the station number of the PLC side Ethernet module set in the parameter setting of GX Developer.)
When using the station No. switching function, check the data of the switching station No. device.
425 A duplicate IP address has been detected. Confirm the setting.
A duplication of IP address with another device has been detected. Change the IP address of GOT or the other device.
448 PLC cannot handle as requested. Correct devices.
A device outside the range of PLC CPU file registers and the buffer memory was specified. Correct the monitor device by setting file register of the PLC CPU.
449 Dedicated device is out of range. Confirm device range.
Set the address for the special function module in the GOT monitor available range.
Set the device in the GOT monitor available range.
450 Path has changed or timeout occurred in redundant system.
The path has been switched or timeout occurred in the redundant system. Check the PLC CPU to know if the path has been switched. Check the cable connection status, the communication unit installation
status, and the PLC CPU status. This error may occur when the load of the PLC CPU becomes heavier
when accessing other stations. In such a case, transfer the data of the other stations to the host station PLC CPU and monitor them at the host.
Perform one of the following operations if the PLC scanning time is long: COM instruction/Extension of END processing/Setting of the number of processing times for general data/Data update batch processing.
451 Q redundant system settings and current config. do not match.
Change the Q redundant setting in accordance with the actual Q redundant CPU system.
460 Communication unit error Reset the power of the GOT. Replace the unit.
480 Communication channel not set. Set channel number on Utility.
Channel (CH.No.1 to 4) to communicate with a controller is not set. After setting the Communication Settings on the GT Designer3 or GT
Designer2, download it to the GOT. Change the channel assignment in the Communication Setting on the
utility.
*1
481 Communication unit not mounted to the slot of active channel.
The interface where the channel (CH No.1 to 4) is set does not have a communication unit installed. Install a communication unit to the interface where the channel (CH
No.1 to 4) is set. Change assignment of the channel (CH No.1 to 4) in the
Communication Setting.
*1
482 Too many same units are mounted. Confirm the no of units.
Units are mounted on the GOT exceeding the maximum number of mountable units. Check the number of units, and remove unnecessary units.
*1
Error code
Error message Action Channel No.
storage
10.3 Error Message and System Alarm 10 - 23
483 Simultaneous mounting of the units are not allowed.
Two or more units which cannot be mounted on the GOT simultaneously are mounted. Check the mounted units, and remove unnecessary units.
*1
484 Unit mounted incorrectly. Move the unit to correct position.
The unit is not mounted on the GOT in the correct position. Confirm the mounting position of the unit.
*1
485 Too many units mounted on GOT. Reduce units.
Units are mounted on the GOT exceeding the maximum number of mountable units. Check the number of units, and remove unnecessary units.
*1
486 Communication unit not corresponded to set communication driver.
The communication driver set in the Communication Setting and the communication unit installed on the GOT do not match. Check whether the communication driver set in the Communication
Setting is correct. Check whether any incorrect communication unit has been installed on
the GOT.
*1
487 Please turn on the PLC and the GOT again.
Turn the power of the PLC and GOT on again.
488 Too many units mounted on GOT. Reduce units.
Units are mounted on the GOT exceeding the maximum number of mountable units.Check the number of units, and remove unnecessary units.
*1
489 Inactive channel has been selected at Communication Settings.
Inactive channel No. has been set in the project data. Check whether any unnecessary channel No. has been set in the
project data. Check whether channel Nos. set in the project data are set in the
Communication Settings.
*1
490 Simultaneous mounting of the units are not allowed.
Two or more units which cannot be mounted on the GOT simultaneously are mounted.Check the mounted units, and remove unnecessary units.
*1
491 Too many units mounted on GOT. Reduce units.
Units are mounted on the GOT exceeding the maximum number of mountable units.Check the number of units, and remove unnecessary units.
*1
492 Unusable communication units are mounted.
Unit unusable for GOT is installed. Remove the unusable unit.
*1
500 Warning! Built-in battery voltage is low.
The voltage of the GOT built-in battery is decreased. Replace the GOT built-in battery.
502 Warning! Backlight needs replacement soon.
The dedicated GS is notifying that the backlight power on addition time has reached 80% or more of the set time. The GOT can be restored by executing the addition times reset function after replacing the backlight. The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually. In such a case, turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition time.
503 Warning! Display section needs replacement soon.
The dedicated GS is notifying that the display section power on addition time has reached 80% or more of the set time. The GOT can be restored by executing the addition times reset function after replacing the display section. The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually. In such a case, turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition time.
504 Warning! Touch panel needs replacement soon.
The dedicated GS is notifying that the touching count of the touch key has reached 80% or more of the set count number. The GOT can be restored by executing the addition times reset function after replacing the touch key. The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually. In such a case, turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition times.
Error code
Error message Action Channel No.
storage
10 - 24 10.3 Error Message and System Alarm
9
M AI
N TE
N AN
C E
AN D
IN
SP EC
TI O
N
10
TR O
UB LE
SH O
O TI
NG AP
PE N
D IC
ES
505 Warning! Built-in Flash ROM needs replacement soon.
The dedicated GS is notifying that the built-in flash memory writing times have reached 80% or more of the set times. The GOT must be replaced. In that case, Data backup and re-setting are needed. The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually. In such a case, turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition times.
506 Warning! Backlight needs replacement.
The dedicated GS is notifying that the backlight power on addition time has reached the set time or more. The GOT can be restored by executing the addition times reset function after replacing the backlight. The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually. In such a case, turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition time.
507 Warning! Display section needs replacement.
The dedicated GS is notifying that the display section power on addition time has reached the set time or more. The GOT can be restored by executing the addition times reset function after replacing the display section. The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually. In such a case, turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition time.
508 Warning! Touch panel needs replacement.
The dedicated GS is notifying that the touching count of the touch key has reached the set count number or more. The GOT can be restored by executing the addition times reset function after replacing the touch key. The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually. In such a case, turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition times.
509 Warning! Built-in Flash ROM needs replacement. Change the GOT.
The dedicated GS is notifying that the built-in flash memory writing times have reached the set times or more. The GOT must be replaced. In that case, Data backup and re-setting are needed. The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually. In such a case, turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition times.
510 Clock data input out of range
The value that is input as clock data is out of the input enabled range. In this case, the input value is not accepted. Confirm the input range of the value to be input as clock data, and input the proper value again.
511 A blown backlight is detected. The backlight is shut off or the lighting status of the backlight is unstable. If the error is detected repeatedly, contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.
520 Insufficient Flash ROM capacity The capacity for the buffering area is insufficient in the build in flash memory Confirm whether there are no mistakes in specified buffering area size.
521 Insufficient user memory (RAM) capacity
The capacity for the buffering area is insufficient in the user memory (RAM) Confirm whether there are no mistakes in specified buffering area size.
522 Unnecessary file deleted to create new file.
The old file of different contents has been deleted and a new file has been created. Note that the old file is deleted and the new file is created if the file of the same name with different contents exists when creating files.
524 Device writing error. Correct device.
When writing in the device, error occurred. Correct the device.
525 Unable to read/write alarm log files under different projects.
Unable to read the alarm log file saved by the different project. Confirm the alarm log file and where to store the alarm log file.
526 File conversion failed. The file specified for the file conversion does not exist. Check the settings for specifying a file to be converted.
Error code
Error message Action Channel No.
storage
10.3 Error Message and System Alarm 10 - 25
527 Insufficient SRAM capacity. The capacity for the SRAM user area is insufficient. Confirm the available memory in the SRAM user area.
528 Error in SRAM. Failed to write data.
The error may be caused by a failure in the GOT main unit. Contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.
529 Data error in SRAM. Check the battery life.
Error in SRAM data due to battery voltage low, etc. Confirm the battery status.
530 Improper monitor device. Confirm monitor channel.
The channel of the specified monitor target does not exist or the channel is not the monitor target. Confirm the monitor target channel of the screen data.
535 Cannot open image file. Confirm whether any file exists in the CF card or USB memory.
536 Image file error or invalid file format.
Confirm whether image files in the CF card or USB memory are normal.
Confirm whether any image file of invalid format is stored.
550 Invalid key code The key code input execution trigger was ON with the non-target key code set in the key code storage device. Confirm the key code supported by the object where error occurs.
560 Language switch failure. Install optional functions.
Switched language specifying KANJI other than Japanese without the option OS installed. Install the option OS.
561 Language switch failure. Load expansion memory board.
Switched language specifying a KANJI region other than Japanese without the option function board with add-on memory installed. Install the option function board with add-on memory.
562 Install the font appropriate for the specified system language.
No font appropriate for the system language specified at the system language switching is installed. Install the appropriate font.
570 Recipe device points too large.
The number of the set points of the recipe device exceeds the specified range. Put the number of the set points of the recipe device within the specified range.
571 Capacity shortage of user memory (RAM)
There is no empty area/space in D drive. Format the D drive in the memory to secure free area.
581 Abnormal Advanced recipe file Advanced Recipe cannot be executed for advanced recipe file with incorrect contents. Delete the advanced recipe file from the CF card or USB memory.
582 Cannot generate Advanced recipe file.
Cannot generate advanced recipe file. Confirm the following and execute recipe processing again. Confirm whether the CF card or USB memory is installed. Confirm whether the CF card access switch of the GOT is ON. Confirm the available memory of the CF card or USB memory.
583 Unable to save device value to Advanced recipe file.
Unable to save device value to advanced recipe file. Confirm the write-protection of the CF card or USB memory. Confirm whether the attribute of saving file is for reading only.
584 Advance recipe file save error An error has occurred during the advanced recipe file writing. Do not pull out the CF card or USB memory while the Advanced Recipe is operating.
585 Advanced recipe file upload error
An error has occurred during the advanced recipe file reading. Do not pull the CF card or USB memory out while the Advanced Recipe is operating.
586 Specified Advanced recipe number does not exist.
The advanced recipe of non-existing number is about to be executed. Execute advanced recipe of existing number.
Error code
Error message Action Channel No.
storage
10 - 26 10.3 Error Message and System Alarm
9
M AI
N TE
N AN
C E
AN D
IN
SP EC
TI O
N
10
TR O
UB LE
SH O
O TI
NG AP
PE N
D IC
ES
587 Specified record number does not exist.
The advanced record of non-existing number is about to be executed. Execute record of existing number.
588 Cannot save recipe data to read only record.
Saving recipe is about to be executed to the record of which recipe device value cannot be edited. Make the recipe device value of the record editable with Advanced Recipe Setting of GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 or specify the record of which recipe device value can be edited.
589 Recipe device save error. Recipe file does not exist.
Saving recipe is about to be executed to the advanced recipe setting that is set for not using file. Specify the advanced recipe setting that uses file.
590 Recipe device upload error. Recipe device value does not exist.
Loading recipe is about to be executed to the record of which recipe device value is not set. Specify the record of which recipe device value is set.
591 Advanced Recipe error. Check recipe data.
The advanced recipe setting is not correct. Confirm the advanced recipe setting of the project data and download it to the GOT again.
595 Logging file error. Logging file error. When collecting data again, delete logging files and management files.
596 Logging setting does not exist or setting value error.
Logging setting does not exist or setting value error. Specify an existing logging setting in the historical trend graph setting and the historical data list setting.
597 The specified logging ID does not exist.
Check the logging ID in the historical trend graph setting. When setting the logging, enter an existing logging ID. When setting the logging ID by using a device or the graph offset
function, specify the device for the logging ID set in the logging setting.
598 The specified logging setting is incompatible.
Configure the setting so that the number of logging devices set for the logging ID exceeds that of data lines on the historical trend graph.
Configure the setting so that the data type of the logging device set for the logging ID is the same as that of the device specified in the historical trend graph.
600 Unsupported version of printer unit.
The version of OS installed in the GOT is not compatible with the printer unit. Install the extended function OS (Printer) with the latest GT Designer3 or GT Designer2.
601 Printer unit error.
The printer unit is installed incorrectly. The built-in flash memory of the printer unit is broken or the guaranteed life has been elapsed. Check that the printer unit is installed correctly. When the printer unit has been installed correctly, the built-in flash memory is broken or the guaranteed life has been elapsed. Replace the printer unit with new one.
602 Video/RGB unit not mounted Check if the video/RGB input unit is installed. Check if the GOT used supports video/RGB input.
603 External I/O unit error Check if the external I/O unit is correctly installed.
604 Sound output unit error Check if the sound output unit is correctly installed.
605 USB device I/F error The error may be caused by a failure in the GOT. Contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.
606 Multimedia processing unit is not mounted.
Multimedia unit is installed incorrectly. Check that the multimedia unit is installed correctly.
*1
610 Insufficient memory capacity. The memory capacity for the MES interface function is insufficient. Delete unnecessary files, and reserve memory.
Error code
Error message Action Channel No.
storage
10.3 Error Message and System Alarm 10 - 27
611 Improper job files. Confirm job setting.
The contents for job files are unmatched with the settings for job files. Check if there are mistakes in the settings on the setting screen.
612 Cannot access Logging Files Check the memory card
Insert a CF card or USB memory. Turn on the CF card access switch. If the CF card or USB memory have unnecessary files, delete the files.
613 Error in writing logfile Insert a CF card or USB memory. Turn on the CF card access switch. Check if the CF card or USB memory is writable.
614 Error in reading logfile Insert a CF card or USB memory. Turn on the CF card access switch. Check if the CF card or USB memory is readable.
615 Cannot connect to MES Server. Check the Server.
The server does not work normally or the connection path to the server is made up incorrectly. Check the operating conditions of the server. Check the network to the server.
616 Cannot connect to SNTP Server. Check the Server.
The settings for the SNTP server are wrong or the network to the SNTP server is made up incorrectly. Check the operating conditions of the STNP server. Check the network to the SNTP server.
630 Failed to save a video file. Check the CF card available area, installation status, cancellation of write-protect, format status and number of saved files.
631 Failed to save a video file on network.
Check the activation status of personal computer linkage software in file server, the setting of Ethernet FTP function of GOT, the network setting of GOT and file server and the available area of CF card installed in the GOT main unit.
632 Error detected during multimedia processing.
Switch off the GOT and check the installation status of multimedia unit, or change the multimedia unit.
633 The version of the unit software is not the latest.
Install the latest compatible multimedia unit software using the utility of the GOT.
634 No space remaining in the multimedia CF card. Terminating long time recording.
Change the CF card installed on the multimedia unit, or delete unnecessary files.
640 An error occurred in a FTP client process.
Reconfigure the GOT (FTP client) setting. Check the operating status and network line of the FTP server. For the error details, check the GOT special register GS989 (FTP communication error notification).
GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3
641 The license key has not been registered. Confirm your license.
Register the license number for the VNC server function on the GOT.
800 Abnormal module status Refer to explanations of SB0020 on the applicable network manual. For the CC-Link IE Field Network, refer to the manual of MELSEC-Q CC- Link IE Field Network master/local module.
801 Abnormal baton passing status Refer to explanations of SB0047 on the applicable network manual.
802 Abnormal cyclic transmission status
Refer to explanations of SB0049 on the applicable network manual.
803 Transient error Refer to explanations of SB00EE on the applicable network manual.
804 The cable on the IN side is disconnected or is not connected.
Refer to explanations of SB0067 on the applicable network manual.
Error code
Error message Action Channel No.
storage
10 - 28 10.3 Error Message and System Alarm
9
M AI
N TE
N AN
C E
AN D
IN
SP EC
TI O
N
10
TR O
UB LE
SH O
O TI
NG AP
PE N
D IC
ES
*1 When an error occurs, "FFH" is stored to the channel No.
805 The cable on the OUT side is disconnected or is not connected.
Refer to explanations of SB0068 on the applicable network manual.
850 CC-Link switch setting error Check if the switch settings have no error. Check error codes stored in SW006A. Refer to explanations of SB006A on the applicable network manual.
851 Abnormal cyclic transmission status
Check if terminating resistors are connected. Check error codes for the PLC CPU. Check the parameter for the PLC CPU on the master station. Check the error status of the master station. Refer to explanations of SB006E on the applicable network manual.
852 Abnormal host line status Check if the cable is unplugged or not. Refer to explanations of SB0090 on the applicable network manual.
853 Transient error Check the transient error occurrence status for each station stored in SW0094 to SW0097. Refer to explanations of SB0094.
Error code
Error message Action Channel No.
storage
10.3 Error Message and System Alarm 10 - 29
10 - 30 10.3 Error Message and System Alarm
9
M AI
N TE
N AN
C E
AN D
IN
SP EC
TI O
N
10
TR O
U BL
ES H
O O
TI N
G A
PP EN
D IC
ES
APPENDICES
Appendix1 External Dimensions
(1) GT1695
397(15.63)
320(12.60)
29 6(
11 .6
5)
320(12.60)
6 (0 .2
4)
61 (2 .4
0)
10 (0.39) (0.39)
382(15.03) 10
10 (0 .3
9) (0
.3 9)
28 1(
11 .0
6) 10
Unit: mm (inch)
App - 1
(2) GT1685
(0 .3
9) (0
.3 9)
10 22
7( 8.
94 )
24 2(
9. 53
) 56
(2 .2
0)
52 (2
.0 5)
6 (0 .2
4)
10
301(11.85)
240(9.48)
240(9.48)
316(12.44)
Unit: mm (inch)
App - 2
9
M AI
N TE
N AN
C E
AN D
IN
SP EC
TI O
N
10
TR O
U BL
ES H
O O
TI N
G A
PP EN
D IC
ES
(3) GT1675, GT1672
(4) GT1665, GT1662
303(11.93)
252(9.92) 10
(0 .3
9) 19
9( 7.
83 )
21 4(
8. 43
)
10 (0
.3 9)
6( 0.
24 )
56 (2
.2 0)
49 (1
.9 3)
288(11.34)
222(8.74)
Unit: mm (inch)
19 0(
7. 48
)
10 (0
.3 9)
10 (0
.3 9)
17 5(
6. 89
)
226(8.90)
52 (2
.0 5)
6( 0.
24 )
175.5(6.91)
175.5(6.91)
241(9.49)
56 (2
.2 0)
Unit: mm (inch)
App - 3
(5) GT1655
12 0(
4. 72
) 10
(0 .3
9) 10
(0 .3
9)
116(4.5760)
116(4.57)
167(6.57)
13 5(
5. 31
)
6( 0.
24 )
60 (2
.3 6)
152(5.98) Unit: mm (inch)
App - 4
9
M AI
N TE
N AN
C E
AN D
IN
SP EC
TI O
N
10
TR O
U BL
ES H
O O
TI N
G A
PP EN
D IC
ES
(6) Depth dimension and cable bending dimensions of the GOT with extension unit
(a) GT1695
Unit: mm (inch)
GOT rear face GOT side face
Model name A B C D R
(bending radius of the cable)
GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2
95(3.74)
114 (4.49)
0(0)
19.5(0.77) 55(2.17)
GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2
73.5(2.89) 36(1.42)
GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L
95(3.74) 6.5(0.26)
55(2.17)
GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L
73.5(2.89) 36(1.42)
GT15-RS2-9P*2,
GT15-RS4-9S*2 72.5(2.85)
19.5(0.77)
30(1.18)
GT15-RS4-TE*2 33.5(1.32)
GT15-J71LP23-25 *4 *4 *4
GT15-J71BR13 87.5(3.44)
0(0)
30(1.18)
GT15-J71GP23-SX 80(3.15) 33.5(1.32)
15(0.59)
GT15-J71GF13-T2*5 66(2.60) 26(1.02)
GT15-J61BT13 47(1.85)
19.5(0.77)
28(1.10)
GT16M-V4 132(5.20) 18(0.71) 20(0.79)
GT16M-R2 77(3.03) 0(0) 32(1.26)
GT16M-V4R1 BNC:132(5.20) RGB:77(3.03)
BNC : 18(0.71) RGB : 0(0)
BNC:20(0.79) RGB:32(1.26)
GT16M-ROUT 77(3.03) 0(0) 33.5(1.32) 32(1.26)
GT16M-MMR 132(5.20) 18(0.71) 19.5(0.77) 20(0.79)
GT15-PRN 52(2.05) 0(0) 18.5(0.73)
18(0.71)
GT15-CFCD - - - -
GT15-CFEX-C08SET 120(4.72)
114 (4.49)
6(0.24)
19.5(0.77)
55(2.17)
GT15-DIO 81(3.19)
0(0) 43(1.69)
GT15-DIOR
GT15-SOUT 44(1.73) 30(1.18)
B
A
CR *3
Extension unit
D
100(3.94)
or more
Other equipment
*1
Unit: mm (inch)
GOT type Dimension of *
GT1695 55 (2.17)
GT1685 46 (1.81)
GT1675 43(1.69)
GT1672
GT1665 46 (1.81)
GT1662
GT1655 54 (2.13)
App - 5
(b) GT1685
Unit: mm (inch)
Model name A B C D R
(bending radius of the cable)
GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2
95(3.74)
64 (2.52)
31(1.22)
18(0.71)
55(2.17)
GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2
73.5(2.89) 9.5(0.37) 36(1.42)
GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L
95(3.74) 31(1.22)
5(0.20)
55(2.17)
GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L
73.5(2.89) 9.5(0.37) 36(1.42)
GT15-RS2-9P*2,
GT15-RS4-9S*2 72.5(2.85) 8.5(0.33)
18(0.71)
30(1.18)
GT15-RS4-TE*2 33.5(1.32) 0(0)
GT15-J71LP23-25 *4 *4 *4
GT15-J71BR13 87.5(3.44) 23.5(0.93) 30(1.18)
GT15-J71GP23-SX 80(3.15) 16(0.63) 32(1.26)
15(0.59)
GT15-J71GF13-T2*5 66(2.60) 2(0.08) 26(1.02)
GT15-J61BT13 47(1.85) 0(0)
18(0.71)
28(1.10)
GT16M-V4 132(5.20) 68(2.68) 20(0.79)
GT16M-R2 77(3.03) 13(0.51) 32(1.26)
GT16M-V4R1 BNC: 132(5.20) RGB: 77(3.03)
BNC:68(2.68) RGB:13(0.51)
BNC:20(0.79) RGB:32(1.26)
GT16M-ROUT 77(3.03) 13(0.51) 32(1.26)
GT16M-MMR 132(5.20) 68(2.68) 32(1.26) 20(0.79)
GT15-PRN 52(2.05) 0(0) 18(0.71) 18(0.71)
GT15-CFCD - - - 17(0.67)
-
GT15-CFEX-C08SET 120(4.72)
64 (2.52)
56(2.20) 55(2.17)
GT15-DIO 81(3.19) 17(0.67)
18(0.71) 43(1.69)
GT15-DIOR
GT15-SOUT 44(1.73) 0(0) 30(1.18)
App - 6
9
M AI
N TE
N AN
C E
AN D
IN
SP EC
TI O
N
10
TR O
U BL
ES H
O O
TI N
G A
PP EN
D IC
ES
(c) GT1675, GT1672
Unit: mm (inch)
Model name A B C D R
(bending radius of the cable)
GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2
95(3.74)
55 (2.17)
40(1.57)
21(0.83)
55(2.17)
GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2
73.5(2.89) 18.5(0.73) 36(1.42)
GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L
95(3.74) 40(1.57)
8(0.31)
55(2.17)
GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L
73.5(2.89) 18.5(0.73) 36(1.42)
GT15-RS2-9P*2,
GT15-RS4-9S*2 72.5(2.85) 17.5(0.69)
21(0.83)
30(1.18)
GT15-RS4-TE*2 33.5(1.32) 0(0)
GT15-J71LP23-25 *4 *4 *4
GT15-J71BR13 87.5(3.44) 32.5(1.28) 30(1.18)
GT15-J71GP23-SX 80(3.15) 25(0.98) 35(1.38)
15(0.59)
GT15-J71GF13-T2*5 66(2.60) 11(0.43) 26(1.02)
GT15-J61BT13 47(1.85) 0(0)
21(0.83)
28(1.10)
GT16M-V4 132(5.20) 77(3.03) 20(0.79)
GT16M-R2 77(3.03) 22(0.87) 32(1.26)
GT16M-V4R1 BNC: 132(5.20) RGB: 77(3.03)
BNC : 77(3.03) RGB : 22(0.87)
BNC:20(0.79) RGB:32(1.26)
GT16M-ROUT 77(3.03) 22(0.87) 32(1.26)
GT16M-MMR 132(5.20) 77(3.03) 35(1.38) 20(0.79)
GT15-PRN 52(2.05) 0(0) 21(0.83) 18(0.71)
GT15-CFCD - - - 20(0.79)
-
GT15-CFEX-C08SET 120(4.72)
55 (2.17)
65(2.56) 55(2.17)
GT15-DIO 81(3.19) 26(1.02)
21(0.83) 43(1.69)
GT15-DIOR
GT15-SOUT 44(1.73) 0(0) 30(1.18)
App - 7
(d) GT1665, GT1662
Unit: mm (inch)
Model name A B C D R
(bending radius of the cable)
GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2
95(3.74)
45 (1.77)
50(1.97)
23(0.91)
55(2.17)
GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2
73.5(2.89) 28.5(1.12) 36(1.42)
GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L
95(3.74) 50(1.97)
10(0.39)
55(2.17)
GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L
73.5(2.89) 28.5(1.12) 36(1.42)
GT15-RS2-9P*2,
GT15-RS4-9S*2 72.5(2.85) 27.5(1.08)
23(0.91)
30(1.18)
GT15-RS4-TE*2 33.5(1.32) 0(0)
GT15-J71LP23-25 *4 *4 *4
GT15-J71BR13 87.5(3.44) 42.5(1.67) 30(1.18)
GT15-J71GP23-SX 80(3.15) 35(1.38) 37(1.46)
15(0.59)
GT15-J71GF13-T2*5 66(2.60) 21(0.83) 26(1.02)
GT15-J61BT13 47(1.85) 2(0.08)
23(0.91)
28(1.10)
GT16M-V4 132(5.20) 87(3.43) 20(0.79)
GT16M-R2 77(3.03) 32(1.26) 32(1.26)
GT16M-V4R1 BNC: 132(5.20) RGB: 77(3.03)
BNC : 87(3.43) RGB : 32(1.26)
BNC:20(0.79) RGB:32(1.26)
GT16M-ROUT 77(3.03) 32(1.26) 32(1.26)
GT16M-MMR 132(5.20) 87(3.43) 37(1.46) 20(0.79)
GT15-PRN 52(2.05) 7(0.28) 23(0.91) 18(0.71)
GT15-CFCD - - - 22(0.87)
-
GT15-CFEX-C08SET 120(4.72)
45 (1.77)
75(2.95) 55(2.17)
GT15-DIO 81(3.19) 36(1.42)
23(0.91) 43(1.69)
GT15-DIOR
GT15-SOUT 44(1.73) 0(0) 30(1.18)
App - 8
9
M AI
N TE
N AN
C E
AN D
IN
SP EC
TI O
N
10
TR O
U BL
ES H
O O
TI N
G A
PP EN
D IC
ES
(e) GT1655
Unit: mm (inch) *1 Refer to App.1 (7) for the depth dimensions when installing units, which allows multiple stages. *2 For cables prepaired by the user, the dimensions are different. *3 If cable bending radius is smaller than the lowest part of the GOT rear face, the dimension of *3 is equal to or less than 0;
however, it is written as "0" in the table. *4 For details of the cable for GT15-J71LP23-25 (optical loop unit), contact your local Mitsubishi (Electric System) Service. *5 The bend radius varies depending on the Ethernet cable to be used.
Model name A B C D R
(bending radius of the cable)
GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2
95(3.74)
16 (0.63)
79(3.11) 23(0.91)
55(2.17)
GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2
73.5(2.89) 57.5(2.26) 36(1.42)
GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L
95(3.74) 79(3.11) 10(0.39)
55(2.17)
GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L
73.5(2.89) 57.5(2.26) 36(1.42)
GT15-RS2-9P*2,
GT15-RS4-9S*2 72.5(2.85) 56.5(2.22)
23(0.91)
30(1.18)
GT15-RS4-TE*2 33.5(1.32) 17.5(0.69)
GT15-J71LP23-25 *4 *4 *4
GT15-J71BR13 87.5(3.44) 71.5(2.81) 30(1.18)
GT15-J71GP23-SX 80(3.15) 64(2.52) 37(1.46)
15(0.59)
GT15-J71GF13-T2*5 66(2.60) 50(1.97) 26(1.02)
GT15-J61BT13 47(1.85) 31(1.22) 23(0.91) 28(1.10)
GT15-PRN 52(2.05) 36(1.42) 23(0.91) 18(0.71)
GT15-CFCD - - - 22(0.87)
-
GT15-CFEX-C08SET 120(4.72)
16 (0.63)
104(4.09) 55(2.17)
GT15-DIO 81(3.19) 65(2.56)
23(0.91) 43(1.69)
GT15-DIOR
GT15-SOUT 44(1.73) 28(1.10) 30(1.18)
App - 9
(7) Depth dimensions for installing multiple stages The following shows how to calculate the depth dimensions for installing multiple stages to the GOT. When installing only the first stage , refer to the dimensions in App.1 (6).
1. Select the GOT main unit coefficient from the following list.
2. Select the option coefficient of the corresponding extension unit from the following list.
Unit: mm (inch) *1 When installing GT16M-V4, GT16M-R2, GT16M-V4R1, GT16M-ROUT, or GT16M-MMR, and GT15-J71GP23-SX or GT15-
J71GF13-T2, install GT15-J71GP23-SX or GT15-J71GF13-T2 in the second stage.
3. Substitute the coefficients selected in step 1 and Step 2 to the following formula. E (for 2 stages) = G (GOT main unit coefficient) + H (option coefficient) + H (option coefficient) F (for 3 stages) = G (GOT main unit coefficient) + H (option coefficient) + H (option coefficient) + H (option coefficient)
GOT side face
Model name H (option
coefficient)
GT15-CFCD, GT15-CFEX-C08SET 20.5(0.81)
GT16M-V4*1, GT16M-R2*1, GT16M-V4R1*1, GT16M-ROUT*1, GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE, GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13, GT15-J61BT13, GT15-PRN, GT15-DIO, GT15-DIOR, GT15-SOUT
21.5(0.85)
GT16M-MMR*1, GT15-J71GP23-SX*1, GT15-J71GF13-T2*1 35.5(1.40)
Example) A calculation example is shown below. F dimension (for 3 stages) for installing a multimedia unit (GT16M-MMR) in the first stage, a CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit (GT15-J71GP23-SX) in the second stage and a CF card unit (GT15-CFCD) in the third stage of the GT1695M-X
F (for 3 stages) = -2 (main unit coefficient of GT1695M-X) + 35.5 (option coefficient of GT16M-MMR) + 35.5 (GT15-J71GP23-SX) + 20.5 (GT15-CFCD) = 89.5 The dimension after installing the above-mentioned extension units is F=89.5mm.
Other equipment
100(3.94) or more
E
F
Unit: mm (inch)
GOT type G (main unit coefficient)
GT1695 -2(-0.08)
GT1685 -3.5(-0.14)
GT1675 -0.5(-0.02)
GT1672
GT1665
1.5(0.06)GT1662
GT1655
App - 10
9
M AI
N TE
N AN
C E
AN D
IN
SP EC
TI O
N
10
TR O
U BL
ES H
O O
TI N
G A
PP EN
D IC
ES
(8) External dimensions of the communication cable
(a) External dimensions of the bus connection cable connector
*1: The GT15-C EXSS cable has a grounding wire (1 m).
The GT15-C BS cable has a grounding wire (For the cable length of 10m or more: 1m, for the cable length less than 10m: 0.5m). Be sure to connect the wire to control panels.
*2: The GT15-C EXSS-1 is the set product consisting of (GT15-EXCNB+GT15-C BS). (Refer to Fig. A)
Unit:mm(inch)
Cable model Cable length (m(ft.)) External dimensions
GT15-QC B 0.6(2.0),1.2(3.9),3(10),5(16),10(33) Fig. 1
GT15-QC BS 15(49),20(66),25(82),30(98),35(115) Fig. 1
GT15-C NB 1.2(3.9),3(10),5(16) Fig. 2
GT15-AC B 0.6(2.0),1.2(3.9),3(10),5(16) Fig. 3
GT15-A370C B-S1 1.2(3.9),2.5(8.2) Fig. 4
GT15-A370C B 1.2(3.9),2.5(8.2) Fig. 5
GT15-A1SC B 0.7(2.3),1.2(3.9),3(10),5(16) Fig. 6
GT15-A1SC NB 0.45(1.5),0.7(2.3),3(10),5(16) Fig. 7
GT15-C EXSS-1 10.6(34.8),20.6(67.6),30.6(100) Figs. 8 & 9
GT15-EXCNB 0.5(1.6) Fig.8
GT15-C BS 0.7(2.3),1.2(3.9),3(10),5(16),10(33),20(66),30(98) Fig. 9
GT15-J2C10B 1(3) Fig. 10
Fig. A
GT15-EXCNB (Fig. 8) GT15-C BS (Fig. 9)
PLC side GOT side
+G O
T side C
O N
2
C O
N 1
145 (5.71)
L 95 (3.74)10(0.39)
42 (1
.6 5)
34.5 (1.36)
Cable approx. 10(0.39)
Fig.1
Ferrite core, approx. 35(1.38) 40(1.57),red holder tube
20 (0.79)
60 (2.36)
58 (2
.2 8)
70 (2.76)
50 (1.97)
32 (1.26) 11.5
(0.45)
49
(1 .9
3) L
Fig.2
Cable approx. 8.0(0.31)
Ferrite core, approx. 35(1.38) 40(1.57),green holder tubePLC side
GOT side
20 (0.79)
60 (2.36) 50
(1.97) 70 (2.76)
58 (2
.2 8)
Fig.3 L
Cable approx. 17.0(0.67)
Ferrite core, approx. 32(1.26) 16(0.63),green holder tube
11.5 (0.45)
32 (1.26)
110 (4.33)
49 (1
.9 3)
L 50 (1.97)
Cable approx. 8.0(0.31)
Ferrite core, approx. 35(1.38) 40(1.57),green holder tube
Fig.4
L 60 (2.36) 20
(0.79)
58
(2 .2
8)
Fig.5
11.5 (0.45)
32 (1.26)
110 (4.33)
49 (1
.9 3)
50 (1.97)
Ferrite core, approx. 35(1.38) 40(1.57),green holder tube
Motion controller side A7GT-CNB side
Cable approx. 8.0(0.31)
160 (6.30)
L 110 (4.33)
Fig.6 11.5 (0.45)
33 (1.30)
49 (1
.9 3)
Ferrite core, approx. 35(1.38) 40(1.57),green holder tube
Cable approx. 8.0(0.31)
App - 11
(b) External dimensions of RS-422 connection cable connector
Unit:mm(inch)
Cable model Cable length (m(ft.)) External dimensions
GT16-C02R4-9S 0.2(0.7) Fig. 11
GT01-C30R4-25P 3(10) Fig. 12
GT01-C R4-25P 10(33),20(66),30(98) Fig. 13
GT01-C R4-8P 1(3),3(10),10(33),20(66),30(98) Fig. 14
GT10-C R4-8P 1(3),3(10),10(33),20(66),30(98) Fig. 15
GT10-C R4-25P 3(10),10(33),20(66),30(98) Fig. 16
GT10-C10R4-8PL 1(3) Fig. 17
50 (1.97)
Fig.7
PLC side A7GT-CNB side
L 110 (4.33)
11.5 (0.45)
32 (1.26)
49 (1
.9 3)
20 (0.79)
60 (2.36)
58
(2 .2
8)
Ferrite core, approx. 35(1.38) 40(1.57),green holder tube
Cable approx. 8.0(0.31)
1000
(39.37)
500
(19.69)
75
(2.95)
20.5
(0.81)
Fig.8 FG cable
PLC side GOT side
6
0
(2 .3
6 )
11.5
(0.45) 32
(1.26)
4 9
(1 .9
3 )
G O
T s
id e
C O
N 2
C O
N 1
50 (1
.9 7)
33 (1.30) L
110 (4.33)
160 (6.30)
FG cable
Ferrite core, approx. 35(1.38) 40(1.57),blue holder tube
Cable approx. 9.0(0.35)
Fig.9 11.5 (0.45)
1000
(39.37)
70
(2.76) 100
(3.94)
A0J2-PW side
GOT side
4
9
(1 .9
3 )
11.5
(0.45)
32
(1.26)
Fig.10
15
(0.59)
8
(0.31) 45.5
(1.79)
38
(1.50) 200
(7.87)
3 2
.5
(1 .2
8 )
2
1
(0 .8
3 )
Fig.11
5(0.20)
50
(1.97)
16
(0.63)
3 5
(1 .3
8 )
53
(2.09)
5 5
(2 .1
7 )
3000
(118.11)
16
(0.63)
Fig.12
LFig.13 50 (1.97)
16 (0.63)
35 (1
.3 8)
53 (2.09)
55 (2
.1 7)7(0.28)
16 (0.63)
6(0.24)
40 (1.57)
13 (0.51)
13 (0
.5 1) Fig.14 L50
(1.97) 16
(0.63)
35 (1
.3 8)
25(0.98) 33(1.30)
30
(1.18)
L 40
(1.57)250
(9.84)
Fig.15 53
(2.09)
5 5
(2 .1
7 )
16
(0.63)
30
(1.18)
L
250
(9.84)
Fig.16
1000
(39.4)
38
(1.50)
3 0
(1 .1
8 )
30
(1.18) 250
(9.84)
Fig.17
App - 12
9
M AI
N TE
N AN
C E
AN D
IN
SP EC
TI O
N
10
TR O
U BL
ES H
O O
TI N
G A
PP EN
D IC
ES
(c) External dimensions of RS-232 conversion cable connector
Unit:mm(inch)
(d) External dimensions of RS-485 terminal block conversion unit
Unit:mm(inch)
Cable model Cable length (m(ft.)) External dimensions
GT01-C30R2-6P 3(10) Fig. 18
GT01-C30R2-9S 3(10) Fig. 19
GT01-C30R2-25P 3(10) Fig. 20
GT10-C30R2-6P 3(10) Fig. 21
Cable model Cable length (m(ft.)) External dimensions
FA-LTBGTR4CBL 0.5(1.6),1(3),2(6.6) Fig. 22
50
(1.97)
40
(1.57)
13
(0.51)
3000
(118.11)
3 5
(1 .3
8 )
Fig.18 16
(0.63)
1 3
(0 .5
1 )
3000
(118.11)
3 5
(1 .3
8 )
Fig.19 50
(1.97)
50
(1.97)
16
(0.63)
16
(0.63)
3 5
(1 .3
8 )
3000
(118.11)
Fig.20 50
(1.97) 16
(0.63)
3 5
(1 .3
8 )
53
(2.09) 5
5 (2
.1 7
) 16
(0.63) 3000
(118.11)
40
(1.57)200
(7.87)
Approx. 48
(1.89)
30
(1.18)
Fig.21
50 (1.97)
47(1.85) 18
(0.71)
4 (0.16)
29 (1.14)
11 5(
4. 53
)8.1(0.32) 35
(1.38)
93 (3
.6 6)
21 (0
.8 3)
8 (0.31)
L
Fig.22
App - 13
Appendix2 Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards
Rating plate The GOT hardware version, function version, Boot OS version, and the standards conformed by a GOT can be confirmed at the rating plate on the GOT rear face.
Packing box The standards conformed by a GOT can be confirmed by the label on the packing box. Note that the position of the label differs depending on the model or shipment date.
00004701AA00001-B Function version
Hardware version Manufacture month (1 to 9: Manufacture month, X: October, Y: November, Z: December) Manufacture year (Last two digits of the year)
GT16-70VLTTA
GT1675M-VTBA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
D820212216BS00048-D
MAC Address
Serial number
Jun., 2009 or less
Boot OS version (When the number of digits for the Boot OS version is 2, only the last digit is described.)
Compatible backlight model
Conformed standard
D820212216BS00048-D Jul., 2009 or later
Function version
Hardware version Manufacture month (1 to 9: Manufacture month, X: October, Y: November, Z: December) Manufacture year (Last two digits of the year)
Boot OS version (When the number of digits for the Boot OS version is 2, only the last digit is described.)
LED For LED backlight
GT16-70VLTTA For cold cathode tube backlight
Backlight model
The conformed standards
(such as CE) are described.
App - 14
9
M AI
N TE
N AN
C E
AN D
IN
SP EC
TI O
N
10
TR O
U BL
ES H
O O
TI N
G A
PP EN
D IC
ES
Appendix3 Transportation Precautions
When transporting lithium batteries, make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations.
Appendix.3.1 Relevant models
The battery for the GOT1000 Series is classified as shown in the table below.
Appendix.3.2 Transportation guidelines
Products are packed properly in compliance with the transportation regulations prior to shipment. When repacking any of the unpacked products to transport it to another location, make sure to observe the IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations, IMDG Code and other local transportation regulations. For details, please consult your transportation company.
Product name Model Description Handled as
Battery for GOT1000 Series GT15-BAT
Lithium battery Non-dangerous
goodsGT11-50BAT
App - 15
Appendix4 How to Choose Drive
For using a CF card, select the A or B drive according to the following.
(1) A drive The CF card interface built in the GOT is used as the A drive.
(2) B drive The following two units can be used as the B drive. CF card unit
When an additional drive is used, use the CF card unit as the B drive of the GOT. CF card extension unit
When an additional drive is used, use the CF card extension unit as the B drive of the GOT. Use the unit when a CF card interface is needed on the control panel.
Example of how to use CF card unit Infrequently used data, including project data, are saved to a CF card, and frequently used data, including alarm histories and operation logs, are saved to another CF card. The data can be saved in each CF card.
Example of how to use CF card extension unit The CF card extension unit can be used in the same way as the above "Example of how to use CF card unit". For using the CF card extension unit, there is no need to open the control panel's door when a CF card is inserted or ejected.
CF card
The first CF card: Project data
The second CF card: Alarm history, operation log
CF card unitGOT
Inside the control panel
Outside the control panel
Project data is saved to
the first CF card.
GOT
GOT
CF card extension unit
CF card extension unit
Alarm histories and operation logs are
saved to the second CF card.
App - 16
INDEX
IN D
EX
Backlight replacement........................................ 9-7 Backlight shutoff detection and replacement ..... 9-6
Bar code reader................................................... 2-14 Battery ......................................................... 2-15,8-14
Battery voltage low detection and battery replacement ....................................................... 9-4
Buffer circuit cable ................................................. 2-7 Bus connection unit ............................................... 2-5 Bus connector conversion box ............................ 2-13 Bus extension connector box .............................. 2-13
[C] CC-Link communication unit............................ 2-5,8-1 CC-Link IE controller network communication unit ......................................................................... 2-5,8-1 CF card.......................................................... 2-13,8-7 CF card extension unit........................................... 6-1 Clean
Cleaning method................................................ 9-3 Communication unit......................................... 2-5,8-1
Applicable communication unit .......................... 8-1 Component list....................................................... 2-2 Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards ......................................................................... App-14 Connection cables for MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLCs...................................................................... 2-7 Control panel inside temperature and mounting angle.................................................................... 6-10
[D] Daily inspection ..................................................... 9-2 Dedicated printer connection cable ..................... 2-15 Drawing software................................................. 2-18
[E] EMC and Low Voltage Directive............................ 5-1 Error message and system alarm...................... 10-15 Explanation of the GOT model name .................... 2-2 Explanation of the option model name .................. 2-2 External dimensions .......................................... App-1
[G] General specifications ........................................... 3-1 GOT-to-GOT connection cable.............................. 2-6 GOT-to-GOT long distance connection cable ....... 2-6 GT Designer2 ...................................................... 2-18
[I] Installation Procedure.......................................... 6-10
[L] Large-size CPU extension cable ........................... 2-6
[M] Memory card adaptor................................... 2-14,8-12
[O] Option .................................................................... 2-5 Option function board .................................. 2-14,8-13 Overall configuration.............................................. 2-1
[P] Packing list...........................................................A-24 Panel cutting dimensions....................................... 6-2 Part Names and Settings of the GT1655............... 4-9 Part Names and Settings of the GT1665, GT1662 ............................................................................... 4-7 Part Names and Settings of the GT1675, GT1672 ............................................................................... 4-5 Part names and settings of the GT1685 ................ 4-3 Part names and settings of the GT1695 ................ 4-1 PC connection cable............................................ 2-18 Performance specifications.................................... 3-2 Periodic inspection................................................. 9-2 Power supply wiring............................................... 7-2
Grouding ............................................................ 7-4 Wiring FG cable of bus connection cable......... 7-10 Wiring to GOT power section ............................. 7-3
Protective cover for oil ......................................... 8-17 Protective sheet ........................................... 2-16,8-15
[Q] Q extension cable .................................................. 2-6 Q long distance connection cable.......................... 2-6 QCPU (Q mode) bus connection cable ................. 2-6 QnA/ACPU/Motion controller (A series) bus connection cable.................................................... 2-6
[R] RFID controller..................................................... 2-14 Rough pre-operation procedure............................. 1-3 RS-232 cable ................................................... 2-7,2-8 RS-422 cable ................................................... 2-7,2-9 RS-422 connector conversion cable.................... 2-12 RS-422 conversion unit ....................................... 2-13 RS-485 connector terminal block conversion modules with cable ...................................... 2-13,8-22
[S] Screen data transfer cable................................... 2-18 Small-size CPU extension cable............................ 2-6 Small-size CPU long distance connection cable ... 2-6 Stand ........................................................... 2-15,8-20 System configuration ............................................. 2-1
[T] Third party PLC connection cable.................... 2-3,2-8
Index-1
Transportation Precautions .............................App-15
[U] USB environmental protection cover ........... 2-17,8-19
Index-2
REVISIONS
For the software functions, refer to the product-specific screen design manual. The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
(Continued to next page)
Print Date Manual Number Revision
May 2010 SH(NA)-080928ENG-A First edition
Jun. 2010 SH(NA)-080928ENG-B Added GT1675-VN, GT1672-VN, GT1662-VN
Oct. 2010 SH(NA)-080928ENG-C Compatible with GT Designer3 Version1.19V CF card with 4GB, 8GB, and 16GB supported
Jan. 2011 SH(NA)-080928ENG-D Compatible with GT Designer3 Version1.23Z Error code list added Error message of duplicate IP address added
Apr. 2011 SH(NA)-080928ENG-E Compatible with GT Designer3 Version1.28E Compatible with GT1655-V Error code list added Description of fingerprint unit deleted
Jul. 2011 SH(NA)-080928ENG-F Compatible with GT Designer3 Version1.31H CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit added Protective sheet (covered USB environmental protection cover type) added Error code list added
Sep. 2011 SH(NA)-080928ENG-G LCD change for the GT1675M-V supported Backlight change in accordance with the LCD change for the GT1675M-V
supported Rating plate change supported Error code list added
Feb. 2012 SH(NA)-080928ENG-H Replacement procedure of the backlight for the GT1675M-V (manufactured in February 2012 or later) changed
Apr. 2012 SH(NA)-080928ENG-I Compatible with GT Designer3 Version1.45X Description of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS changed JIS B 3502 specification change supported Explanation of GOT mounting position corrected Waterproof function of protective cover for oil deleted
Jun. 2012 SH(NA)-080928ENG-J Description of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS changed
Nov. 2012 SH(NA)-080928ENG-K Compatible with GT Designer3 Version1.63R Corrective action for the error code added
Feb. 2013 SH(NA)-080928ENG-L Compatible with GT Designer3 Version1.67V Corrective action for the error code added Error code list deleted
REVISIONS - 1
* The manual number is given on the left bottom of the back cover.
2010 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
Print Date *Manual Number Revision
Jun. 2013 SH(NA)-080928ENG-M Compatible with GT Designer3 Version1.74C Description of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS changed The company name of Fuji Electric FA Components & Systems Co., Ltd. is
changed to FUJI ELECTRIC CO., LTD. The company name of Panasonic Corporation is changed to Panasonic
Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.
Sep. 2013 SH(NA)-080928ENG-N Compatible with GT Designer3 Version1.100E
Jan. 2014 SH(NA)-080928ENG-O Change of the protective ground to the functional ground Change of the functional ground symbol Backlight change associated with the LCD change of the following models
supported GT1695M-X GT1685M-S GT1675M-S,GT1675M-V,GT1675-VN,GT1672-VN GT1665M-S,GT1665M-V,GT1662-VN
Aug. 2016 SH(NA)-080928ENG-P Description of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS changed Writing errors have been corrected
Jun. 2017 SH(NA)-080928ENG-Q Some corrections
Apr. 2019 SH(NA)-080928ENG-R Some corrections
Apr. 2020 SH(NA)-080928ENG-S Some corrections
Jun. 2020 SH(NA)-080928ENG-T Some corrections
Oct. 2020 SH(NA)-080928ENG-U Some corrections
Oct. 2022 SH(NA)-080928ENG-V Some corrections
This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.
REVISIONS - 2
WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.
1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company. However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer's discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing on-site that involves replacement of the failed module. [Gratis Warranty Term]
The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for thirty-six (36) months after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place. Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months, and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be forty-two (42) months. The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs.
[Gratis Warranty Range] (1) The customer shall be responsible for the primary failure diagnosis unless otherwise specified. If requested by the customer, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation or its representative firm may carry out the primary failure
diagnosis at the customers expence. The primary failure diagnosis will, however, be free of charge should the cause of failure be attributable to Mitsubishi Electric
Corporation. (2) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods and usage environment, etc., which follow
the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution labels on the product. (3) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged for in the following cases.
1. Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure caused by the user's hardware or software design.
2. Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user. 3. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided if functions or
structures, judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards, had been provided.
4. Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced.
5. Replacing consumable parts such as the battery, backlight and fuses. 6. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused by force majeure
such as earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage. 7. Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi. 8. Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user.
2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production (1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is discontinued.
Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc. (2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available after production is discontinued.
3. Overseas service Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ.
4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi, loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products, special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products, replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.
5. Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice.
6. Product application (1) In using the Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal, the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major
accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the graphic operation terminal device, and that backup and fail-safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault.
(2) The Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries, etc. Thus, applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies, and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required, such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the graphic operation terminal applications. In addition, applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected, such as in aircraft, medical applications, incineration and fuel devices, manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement, and safety devices, shall also be excluded from the graphic operation terminal range of applications. However, in certain cases, some applications may be possible, providing the user consults the local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project, and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances, solely at our discretion.
In some of three cases, however, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation may consider the possibility of an application, provided that the customer notifies Mitsubishi Electric Corporation of the intention, the application is clearly defined and any special quality is not required.
GOT is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Server, Windows Vista, and Windows 7 are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Pentium and Celeron are a registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries. Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States. MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA. VNC is a registered trademark of RealVNC Ltd. in the United States and other countries. Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
SH(NA)-080928ENG-V
GT16 User's Manual (Hardware)
MODEL
MODEL CODE
GT16-U(HW-SHO)-E
1D7MD3
SH(NA)-080928ENG-V(2210)MEE
Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in Japan, October 2022.
When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service transaction permission.
HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS : 1-14 , YADA-MINAMI 5-CHOME , HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA , JAPAN
Related manuals for Mitsubishi GOT1000 GT16 Hardware User's Manual
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the GOT1000 Mitsubishi works, you can view and download the Mitsubishi GOT1000 GT16 Hardware User's Manual on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the User's Manual for Mitsubishi GOT1000 as well as other Mitsubishi manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The User's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mitsubishi GOT1000. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Mitsubishi GOT1000 GT16 Hardware User's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Mitsubishi GOT1000 GT16 Hardware User's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Mitsubishi GOT1000 GT16 Hardware User's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Mitsubishi GOT1000 GT16 Hardware User's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mitsubishi GOT1000 GT16 Hardware User's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.